PlantPAx Faceplates for

Process Controller
Instructions

Reference Manual Original Instructions

PlantPAx Faceplates for Process Controller Instructions Reference Manual

Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before
you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to
requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably
trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this
equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with
any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Download Firmware, Add-on Profiles, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1
PlantPAx Process Control PlantPAx Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Instructions Incorporating the Library HMI Files into your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Import Visualization Files for FactoryTalk View SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Import HMI Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copy Visualization Files for Studio 5000 View Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 2
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates Basic Faceplate Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operator (Home) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagnostics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Faults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Trends Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Quick Display Interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Define Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Define HMI Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Define Navigation to Other Object Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configure Faceplate Behavior While Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 3
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates Basic Faceplate Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Advanced Properties Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Diagnostics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Trends Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Advanced Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Advanced Command Source Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Graphic Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Define HMI Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Define Navigation to Other Object Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 3

Table of Contents

Chapter 4
Studio 5000 View Designer Basic Faceplate Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Faceplates Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Diagnostics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Trends Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Define HMI Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 5
Process Analog Input (PAI) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Maintenance Tab - PV Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Maintenance Tab - Clamping Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Maintenance Tab - Control Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Maintenance Tab - Use Substitute PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Clamp Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Threshold Gate Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Advanced Engineering Tab - Raw Input Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Advanced Engineering Tab - PV Actions on Exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Chapter 6
Process Analog HART (PAH) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Smart Device Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Smart Device Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Smart Device Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Smart Device HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Smart Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Table of Contents

Chapter 7
Process Dual Sensor Analog Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Input (PAID) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 8
Process Multi Sensor Analog Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Input (PAIM) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 9
Process Analog Output (PAO) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Maintenance Tab - Feedback Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Maintenance Tab - CV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Maintenance Tab - Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Advanced Engineering Tab - CV Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 5

Table of Contents

Advanced Engineering Tab - Shed Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Advanced Engineering Tab - Rate Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 10
Process Boolean Logic (PBL) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Logic Gate Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
View Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
View Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 11
Process Command Source Command Source Totem Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
(PCMDSRC) Operator Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
External Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Maintenance Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Chapter 12
Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
(PD4SD) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Advanced Engineering Tab - State Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Advanced Engineering Tab - Shed Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Chapter 13
Process Deadband Controller Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
(PDBC) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025
 Table of Contents

Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Maintenance Tab - PV Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Maintenance Tab - RoC Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Advanced Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 14
Process Discrete Input (PDI) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Advanced Maintenance Tab - SAMA Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Target Disagree Status Delay Timers . . . . . . . . . . 153
Advanced Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Chapter 15
Process Discrete Output (PDO) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Advanced Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 7
Table of Contents

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Status Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Command Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 16
Process Dosing (PDOSE) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Advanced Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Advanced Engineering Tab - Rate in Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Chapter 17
Process Analog Fanout (PFO) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 18
Process High or Low Selector Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
(PHLS) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

8 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Table of Contents

FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Advanced Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Chapter 19
Process Interlock (PINTLK) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Interlock States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Advanced Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Interlock Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Chapter 20
Process Lead/Lag/Standby Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Motor Group (PLLS) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Manual Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Chapter 21
Process Motor (Power Discrete) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
(PMTR) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 9

Table of Contents

Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Advanced Engineering Tab - Motor Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Advanced Engineering Tab - Motor Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Status Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Command Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Chapter 22
n-Position Device (PNPOS) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Engineering Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Chapter 23
Process Proportional + Integral Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
+ Derivative (PPID) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ramp Wizard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tuning Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Engineering Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Ramp Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Maintenance Tab - Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Advanced Tuning Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Ratio SAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Advanced Maintenance Tab - SP SAMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Error and Gains SAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Advanced Maintenance Tab - CV SAMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Advanced Maintenance Tab - Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
10 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025
 Table of Contents

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Advanced Engineering Tab - Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Advanced Engineering Tab - Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Advanced Engineering Tab - SP Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Advanced Engineering Tab - PV Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Advanced Engineering Tab - CV Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Advanced Engineering Tab - Fail Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Chapter 24
Process Permissive (PPERM) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Permissive States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Engineering Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Advanced Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Chapter 25
Process Pressure/Temperature Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Compensated Flow (PPTC) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Chapter 26
Process Restart Inhibit (PRI) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Chapter 27
Process Run Time (PRT) Graphic Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 11
Table of Contents

FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chapter 28
Process Tank Strapping Table Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
(PTST) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Chapter 29
Process Valve (PVLV) Graphic Symbols (Configured as Hand Operated Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Hand Operated Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates (Configured as Hand Operated Valve). . . . . . 286
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates (Configured as Hand Operated Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Advanced Alarm Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Graphic Symbols (Configured as Motorized Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Motorized Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates (Configured as Motorized Valve) . . . . . . . . . . 297
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates (Configured as Motorized Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025
 Table of Contents

Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Graphic Symbols (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve). . . . . . . . 303
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve). . . 307
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve) . . . . . . . . . . 308
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 30
Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Chapter 31
Process Valve Statistics Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
(PVLVS) FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Advanced Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Advanced HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Advanced Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 13

Table of Contents

Chapter 32
Variable Speed Drive (PVSD) Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Engineering Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance Tab - General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance Tab – Speed Setpoint Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Maintenance Tab – Interlocks and Permissives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Advanced Engineering Tab - Drive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Advanced Engineering Tab - Drive Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Advanced Engineering Tab – Drive Speed Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Advanced Engineering Tab – Input Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Advanced Engineering Tab – Output Datalink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Advanced CmdSrc Tab – Command Source Exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Units and Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Status Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Command Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

14 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Preface

About This Publication This publication provides the faceplate information for the embedded PlantPAx® Instructions
on the process controller (1756-L8xEP).

Summary of Changes This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list includes
substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.
Topic Page
Added FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates chapter. 35
Added FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates and Graphic Symbols to Instructions. throughout
Clarified the PMTR buttons for FactoryTalk View SE. 210

Download Firmware, Add- Download firmware, associated files, and access product release notes from the Product
Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc.
on Profiles, EDS, and Other
Files

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell
Automation. You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.
Resource Description
Helps you understand the elements of the PlantPAx system to make sure that you buy the
Selection Guide, publication PROCES-SG001 proper components.
Template User Manual, publication 9528-UM001 Provides direction on how to install and deploy PlantPAx virtual templates.
Provides system guidelines and instructions to assist with the development of your PlantPAx
Configuration and Implementation User Manual, publication PROCES-UM100 system.
Describes the use of the Library of Process Objects and the Add-On Instruction in the Library
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects, publication PROCES-RM200 of Process Objects.
Process Object parameters Spreadsheet, publication, PROCES-RD200 Describes the PlantPAx Process object parameters.
PlantPAx Visualization Files, publication, PROCES-RD201 Describes the visualization files that are required for the Library of Process Objects.
This manual provides a programmer with details about the available Process instruction set
PlantPAx Process Control Instructions, publication PROCES-RM215 for a Logix-based Process controller.
Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP™ devices to communicate on the EtherNet/
EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual, ENET-UM006 IP network.
Ethernet Reference Manual, ENET-RM002 Describes basic Ethernet concepts, infrastructure components, and infrastructure features.
Provides guidance on how to conduct security assessments, implement Rockwell
System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual, SECURE-RM001 Automation products in a secure system, harden the control system, manage user access,
and dispose of equipment.
UL Standards Listing for Industrial Control Products, Assists original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) with construction of panels, to help ensure
publication CMPNTS-SR002 that they conform to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories.
American Standards, Configurations, and Ratings: Introduction to Provides an overview of American motor circuit design based on methods that are outlined
Motor Circuit Design, publication IC-AT001 in the NEC.
Industrial Components Preventive Maintenance, Enclosures, and Contact Provides a quick reference tool for Allen-Bradley® industrial automation controls and
Ratings Specifications, publication IC-TD002 assemblies.
Designed to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and provides
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in
Solid-state Control, publication SGI-1.1 the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state
components.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Helps configure complete, valid catalog numbers and build complete quotes based on
ProposalWorks™ configuration software, rok.auto/systemtools detailed product information.
Provides coordinated high-fault branch circuit solutions for motor starters, soft starters,
Rockwell Automation Global SCCR tool, rok.auto/sccr and component drives.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 15

Preface

Notes:

16 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 1

PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

When you deploy the process controller in PlantPAx® 5.0 and later, you gain access to
additional PlantPAx instructions. The PlantPAx instructions on the process controller provide
objects that are embedded in the controller firmware. The PlantPAx library download contains
the faceplates that are used for the embedded instructions.

See PlantPAx Process Control Instructions, publication PROCES-RM215 for more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 17

Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

PlantPAx Instructions In PlantPAx 5.0 and later, Rockwell Automation offers process-specific instructions, called
PlantPAx instructions, which are embedded into the process controller. The following table
outlines the PlantPAx instructions in relation to previous releases of PlantPAx Add-On
Instructions. For more detailed information, see the online help section of the Studio 5000
Logix Designer® application.
Libraries noted in the following table:
GEMS - Global Engineering Modular Solutions
RAMS - Rockwell Automation Mining Solutions
PO - Process Objects
Input Processing
Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
CM_AIN (GEMS)
MSAinSiS (RAMS) The Process Analog Input (PAI) instruction monitors an analog input and checks for alarm
Process Analog Input (PAI) P_AIChan (PO) conditions. Use the PAI instruction to process a signal from a channel of an analog input
P_AInAdv (PO) module. Use the PAI instruction with any analog (REAL) signal.
P_Ain (PO)
The Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID) instruction evaluates one analog Process
Variable (PV) by using two analog input signals, from sources such as dual sensors, dual
transmitters, and dual-input channels. The PAID instruction monitors the conditions of
Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID) P_AInDual (PO) the channels and reports configured PV quality. The PAID instruction has functions for
input selection, averaging, and failure detection. Additional functions, such as for filtering
and alarming, are done by a downstream PAI block.
The Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM) instruction evaluates one analog process
variable (PV) by using up to eight analog input signals from sources such as sensors,
Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM) P_AInMulti (PO) transmitters, and input channels. The PAIM instruction has functions for input selection,
averaging, and failure detection. Additional functions, such as filtering and alarming, are
done by a downstream PAI block.
CM_DIN (GEMS) The Process Discrete Input (PDI) instruction monitors a discrete (true or false) input, and
Process Discrete Input (PDI) MsDinSiS (RAMS) checks for alarm conditions. Use the PDI instruction to process a signal from a channel of
P_DIn (PO) a discrete input module. Use the PDI instruction with any discrete (BOOL) signal.
The Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (PPTC) instruction calculates a flow at
Process Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow standard temperature and pressure, essentially a mass flow rate, given a volumetric flow
P_PTComp (PO)
(PPTC) rate or differential pressure measurement. This instruction requires measurements of
the actual temperature and pressure of the flowing gas.
P_StrapTbl (PO) The Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST) instruction calculates the volume of product in
Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST) I_Chrctrztn (GEMS) an upright cylindrical tank, given the level of the product and the tank calibration table.
The Process Analog HART (PAH) instruction is used to provide HART digital data for an
Process HART (PAH) P_AInHART (PO) intelligent analog device alongside the analog input (PAI) or analog output (PAO)
(+ PAI or PAO) P_AOutHART (PO) instruction for that device.

Device Control
Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
CM_AOUT (GEMS) The Process Analog Output (PAO) instruction drives an analog output and checks for
MSAoSoS (RAMS) alarm conditions. Use the PAO instruction for a channel of an analog output module. Use
Process Analog Output (PAO) P_AOut (PO) the PAO instruction with any analog (REAL) signal. In addition, this object supports pulse
P_ValveC (PO) outputs, position feedback input, and position deviation alarming for control valves.
The Process Discrete Output (PDO) instruction drives a discrete (true / false) output,
CM_DOUT (GEMS) monitors discrete inputs serving as feedback from a device driven by the discrete output,
Process Discrete Output (PDO) P_DOut (PO) and checks for alarm conditions. Use the PDO instruction for a channel of a discrete
output module. Use the PDO instruction with any discrete (BOOL) signal.
CM_M2S (GEMS) The Process Motor (PMTR) instruction monitors and controls a fixed single-speed, two-
MsMtrFrS (RAMS) speed, or reversing motor using a full-voltage contactor or intelligent motor controller
P_Motor2Spd (PO) (soft starter). The motor can be run or jogged, including jogging reverse or jogging fast,
P_MotorHO (PO) as configured by the user. The interface to the hardware motor controller can be through
Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR) P_MotorRev (PO) a Device Object Interface or through individual pins. The object is a configurable, built-in
P_Motor (PO) combination of the existing PlantPAx P_Motor (single speed), P_Motor2Spd (two speed),
P_SMC50 (PO) P_MotorRev (reversing), and P_MotorHO (hand-operated or monitor-only) Add-On
P_SMCFlex (PO) instructions in the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

Device Control
Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
CM_V2S (GEMS)
CM_V3S (GEMS) The Process Valve (PVLV) instruction operates a two-position, single-solenoid operated
MsVlv2sS (RAMS) valve, a dual-solenoid operated valve, or a motor-operated valve in various modes,
Process Valve Library (PVLV) MsVlv3S (RAMS) monitoring for fault conditions. It also monitors hand-operated two-position valves. It is a
P_ValveHO (PO) built-in analogy of the existing PlantPAx P_ValveSO, P_ValveMO, and P_ValveHO Add-On
P_ValveMO (PO) instructions in the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects.
P_ValveSO (PO)
CM_VFD (GEMS)
MsVsdFrs (RAMS) The Process Variable Speed Drive (PVSD) instruction monitors and controls a variable
P_PF52x (PO) speed motor using an AC (variable frequency) or DC drive. Use the instruction to run or jog
P_PF6000 (PO)
Process VSD (Power Velocity) (PVSD) the motor, forward or reverse. The drive interface can be through a Device Object
P_PF7000 (PO) Interface or through individual pins. The object is a built-in version of the existing P_VSD
P_PF753 (PO) Add-On Instruction in the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects.
P_PF755 (PO)
P_VSD (PO)
This instruction controls and monitors feedback from a discrete 2-state, 3-state, or 4-
state device s, monitoring for fault conditions. These devices include multiple-speed
motors or multiple position valves.
Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device (PD4SD) raP_Dvc_D4SD Controls four discrete outputs and monitors four discrete feedback inputs. Each output
and input has configurable states of each output in the various device states.
The instruction also monitors permissive and interlock conditions; the latter returns the
device to its default state.
This instruction controls a circular or linear discrete device with up to 30 positions. The
n-Position Device (PNPOS) raP_Dvc_nPos instruction provides outputs to select an individual position.
This Instruction controls one mix-proof valve in various modes and states, and can check
Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP) raP_Dvc_VlvMP position feedback inputs to verify that the valve reached the commanded position. An
alarm can be provided on failure to reach a target position.

Discrete Monitoring and Control

Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
The Process Boolean Logic with Snapshot (PBL) instruction executes up to eight gates of
configurable Boolean logic. Gate types available include AND, OR, XOR (Exclusive-OR),
Process Boolean Logic (PBL) P_Logic (PO) Set/Reset, Select, and Majority. Each gate provides up to four input conditions that are
individually invertible using a configuration setting.
P_Intlk (PO) The Process Interlocks (PINTLK) instruction collects, or sums up, the interlock conditions
P_IntlkAdv (PO) that stop or de-energize a running or energized piece of equipment. This instruction can
I_Multiplex_04 (GEMS) also help prevent equipment from starting or being energized. Interlocks are always
Process Interlock (PINTLK) I_Multiplex_08 (GEMS)
evaluated to de-energize equipment. For permissive conditions that must be made to
I_Multiplex_16 (GEMS) start the equipment, but are ignored once the equipment is running, use the Process
I_Multiplex_32 (GEMS) Permissive (PPERM) instruction.
I_Protective (GEMS)
The Process Lead Lag Standby Motor Group (PLLS) instruction provides control of a
parallel group of motors, such as a set of pumps with a common intake source and
discharge destination. The number of motors to run depends on the demand on the
P_LLS (PO)
Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS) system. The group can be configured to consist of as few as two or as many as 30
MsGrpM8S (RAMS) motors. The minimum demand can be set as low as 0, so that all motors are stopped at
minimum demand. The maximum demand can be set as high as the number of pumps in
the group.
P_Perm (PO) The Process Permissives (PPERM) instruction collects, or sums up, the permissive
I_Multiplex_04 (GEMS) conditions that allow a piece of equipment to energize. In most cases, permissive
ProcessPermissive (PPERM) I_Multiplex_08 (GEMS) conditions must be true to energize equipment. Once the equipment is energized,
I_Multiplex_16 (GEMS) permissives are ignored.
I_Multiplex_32 (GEMS)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 19

Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

Discrete Monitoring and Control

Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
Use the Process Restart Inhibit instruction for Large Motor (PRI) instruction to help
prevent large motors from starting repeatedly. The high starting current for a large
motor causes heating. Continual starts or start attempts in a short period overheat the
motor windings and damage the motor.
Process Restart Inhibit (PRI) P_ResInh (PO)
The PRI instruction provides a rule-based state model for restarts. Do not use the
instruction to model or monitor heating and replace sensor-based motor monitoring
devices. Use the instruction to avoid over stressing a motor.
The Process Run Time and Start Counter (PRT) instruction records the total run time and
number of instances the motor or other equipment starts. The PRT is a software
Process Run Time (PRT) P_RunTime (PO) implementation of the mechanical hour meter that displays the total motor runtime.
Maintenance personnel use the run time and equipment start variables to create a
maintenance schedule for the applicable equipment.
The Process Valve Statistics Object (PVLVS) instruction monitors a two-state (open and
close) valve and records statistics for stroke times and stroke counts to aid in planning
Process Valve Stat (PVLVS) P_ValveStats (PO) maintenance or diagnosing valve and actuator problems. The PVLVS instruction is
designed to work with the PVLV (solenoid, motor, and hand operated) valve instruction.

Ownership
Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
The Process Command Source (PCMDSRC) instruction selects the source of Commands
Process Command Source (PCMDSRC) P_CmdSrc (PO) and Settings for a device. Available command sources are Operator, Program, External,
Override, Maintenance, Out of Service, and Hand.

Procedural Control
Previous Process
PlantPAx Instruction Library Add-On Instruction Description
Instruction
The Process Dosing (PDOSE) instruction controls an ingredient addition or transfer, using
a flowmeter or weigh scale to measure the quantity transferred. When using a flow
measurement, the meter can be an analog flowmeter (signal proportional to flow), a
CM_TOT (GEMS) pulse generating flowmeter (pulse count proportional to quantity delivered), or a digital
CM_WS (GEMS) flowmeter providing flow rate or quantity (totalized flow) information. The instruction
Process Dosing (PDOSE) MsTotSiS (RAMS) also controls an ingredient addition that uses a weigh scale to measure the quantity
P_DoseFM (PO) (totalized flow) information. When using a weigh scale to measure the quantity
P_DoseWS (PO) transferred, the scale can be on the receiving vessel, indicating gain in weight, or on the
sourcing vessel, indicating loss in weight. The weigh scale can be connected using an
analog input, device network, or other connection.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

Regulatory Control
Previous Process Library
PlantPAx Instruction Instruction Description
Add-On Instruction
The Process Deadband Controller (PDBC) provides:

• A Raise output, which is activated when the PV is less than the entered Raise
threshold, and a Lower output, which is activated when the PV is greater than the
entered Lower threshold.
• Q and Q-Not outputs. Q is set when the PV falls below the Raise threshold and
cleared when the PV rises above the Lower threshold; Q-Not is the inverse of Q.
• High and Low Deviation alarms with configurable thresholds and deadbands.
These alarms can provide notification that the PV is approaching an out-of-control
Process Deadband Controller (PDBC) P_DBC (PO) condition.
• Alarms for High PV Rate of Change Increasing and High PV Rate of Change
Decreasing. These alarms can provide notification that the PV is changing faster
than expected.
• Operation in Manual and Automatic Loop Modes. In Automatic Loop Mode, the
outputs are triggered by the control algorithm to keep the PV within limits. In
Manual Loop Mode, the operator directly manipulates the Raise and Lower outputs
from the HMI.
• Operation in Operator, Program, Override, and Maintenance command sources.
The Analog Fanout (PFO) instruction sends one primary analog output signal to
Process Analog Fanout (PFO) P_Fanout (PO) multiple secondary users or devices. Each secondary output has configurable gain,
offset, and clamping limits.
The Process High or Low Selector (PHLS) selects the highest or the lowest of up to six
Process High or Low Selector (PHLS) P_HiLoSel (PO) inputs. The instruction sends the selected value as output and feeds back flagged
values for the unselected inputs for tracking.
Use the Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID) instruction to manipulate
the Control Variable (CV) in regulatory control loops in response to Process Variable
CM_PIDE (GEMS) (PV) readings and Setpoint (SP, the target PV) settings.
CM_PID (GEMS)
Process Regulatory Control (PPID) MSPidBaS (RAMS) The CV is typically used as a cascade setpoint for a secondary, or inner, control loop
MsPidEns (RAMS) or is sent to an Analog Output channel on an I/O card.
P_PIDE (PO)
The PPID instruction integrates functions of the existing PID, PIDE, and P_PIDE Add-
On Instruction into a single built-in instruction and adds additional features.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 21

Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

Incorporating the Library This section describes how to import visualization files for FactoryTalk View SE and View
Designer. For this release of FactoryTalk Optix, the provided Optix project must be used as the
HMI Files into your Project starting project.

For the latest compatible software information and to download the Rockwell Automation
Library, see the Product Compatibility and Download Center.

Import Visualization Files for FactoryTalk View SE

There are several components to import for the visualization files. You import files from the
downloaded Rockwell Automation library files via FactoryTalk® View SE.

Import files in this order:

1. Import HMI Images files.
Select all images and Open.
2. Import Global Object files
Select the global object (.ggfx) files.
3. Import HMI Faceplates
Select the faceplate (.gfx) files.
4. Import Macros
Right-click Macro and select Add Component Into Application.
Select all macros and Open.
5. Import Local Message Files (.loc). These files are used with raP_Opr_EMGen,
raP_Opr_EPGen, and raP_Opr_Unit.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

Import HMI Tags

From the Tools dropdown menu, select Tag Import and Export Wizard. Use the following table
to complete the wizard.
On this Dialog Box Action
Select the operation that you would like to perform Select ‘Import FactoryTalk View tag CSV files’
Choose the FactoryTalk view project that you want to import Browse to the .sed project file that you want the HMI
into tags imported into
Choose the FactoryTalk View CSV files that you want to Select the .csv file that is contained within the
import downloaded Library zipped file
Choose the import options that you want Select ‘Skip existing (fastest)’

When you finish the wizard the FactoryTalk View - Database Import dialog box appears with
the information that the import is complete.

Copy Visualization Files for Studio 5000 View Designer

There are several components to import for use with Studio 5000 View Designer®. Files are
copy and pasted from the provided template project to your working project.
Copy and paste the files in this order:
1. Copy / Paste Image files. Select all images and copy / paste.

2. Copy / Paste Add-On Graphic (AOG) files. Select ONLY the files to copy / paste that will
be used in your project.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 23

Chapter 1 PlantPAx Process Control Instructions

3. Copy / Paste User-Defined pop-up Screens. Select ONLY the files to copy / paste that
will be used in your project.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 2

FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

The library comes with faceplates for use with FactoryTalk® View SE displays.
Faceplate Type Description
The Advanced faceplate has the remaining (less common) maintenance controls and
ALL the engineering configuration items, such as scaling, clamping, and major device
Advanced options (for example, motor-operated or solenoid-operated valve). It gets most of its
use during commissioning or if a device is replaced and the replacement has another
configuration
The basic faceplate has ALL the operator controls and the most common maintenance
Faceplate controls, such as diagnostics, bypassing interlocks, and adjusting failure times and
analog alarm / control thresholds.
The Quick faceplate has the basic operator controls. It is “grid-able” - they are a
consistent size, using a minimum of real estate. It's easy to dedicate a place on the
Quick screen for them to come up so operator can click a device graphic symbol and then
operate the device.

Before you work with faceplates, confirm you have the following:
• Controller project (If you use the library control strategies, there is some pre-built
navigation available to use)
• Configured data server and controller shortcut
• Graphic framework - installed and used to create associated displays

Knowledgebase Technote, PlantPAx System Release 5.30

Configuration and Implementation Tools, contains recommended
FactoryTalk security policy settings for PlantPAx® systems. Download
the spreadsheet from this public article.

You may be asked to sign in to your Rockwell Automation web

account or create an account if you do not have one. You do not need
a support contract to access the article.

Basic Faceplate Attributes Faceplates consist of tabs, and each tab consists of one or more pages. The Operator (Home)
tab is displayed when the faceplate is initially opened. The faceplate provides the means for
operators, maintenance personnel, engineers, and others to interact with an instruction
instance, which includes a view of its status and values. Faceplates also manipulate an
instruction through its commands and settings. Select the appropriate icon on the left of the
faceplate to access a specific tab. This section provides an overview of the faceplate
attributes that are common across the objects. More details are supplied in the individual
section for each object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 25

Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Operator (Home) Tab

Item Action
1 7 1 Select to open the Operator tab.
2 2 Select to open the Maintenance tab.
3 Select to open the Trends tab.
3 4 Select to open the Diagnostics tab.
4 5 Select to open the Alarm tab.
6 Select to open the Help file.
5 7 Select to reset and acknowledge all alarms.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
(Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.)

You configure the tag name of the object that you want to
6 8 navigate to in the extended tag property
"Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing
tag>.@Library and <backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag
properties to display the object’s faceplate.
If the object is configured to have permissive and interlock
9 8 objects (for example, Cfg_HasPermObj (Fast or Slow) or
Cfg_HasIntlkObj is true), the permissive and interlock
indication become buttons. These buttons open the faceplates
9 of the source objects that are used as a permissive or
interlock. Often this is a PPERM or PINTLK instruction. If the
object is not configured in this way, the permissive or interlock
symbols are indicators only.

Maintenance Tab

In the maintenance tab, there is a button for Advanced properties. There are also page
identifiers at the bottom if there are multiple configuration pages. See the following diagram
for common attributes of the maintenance tab.

Item Action
1 1 Select to open the Advanced Properties.
2 Page identifiers

26 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Advanced Properties
The advanced maintenance, engineering, HMI configuration, Diagnostics, and Faults tabs for
the objects are available in the advanced properties faceplate. The advanced maintenance
and engineering tabs have object-specific configurations that are detailed for each object.

The HMI configuration tab has settings that are common to the objects. See the following
diagram for common attributes of the HMI configuration tab.

1
Item Action
2
1 Select to open the HMI Configuration tab.
2 Select to open the engineering tab.
3 3 Select to open the Advanced Maintenance tab.
4 4 Device description that shows on the faceplate title bar.
5 Label to show on the graphic symbol.
5
6 Tag name that shows on the faceplate and on the tooltip for graphic
6 symbols.
7
7 Area name for security.

Hover the cursor over the tag name to see the actual
network path and tag name that is associated with
the object.

Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help prevent device
problems. These problems can include specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device
warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 27

Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Faults Tab
The faults tab contains specific reasons that the device is not ready.

Trends Display
The Trends display shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate trends
provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but not replace, dedicated
historical or live trend displays.

Item Action
1 Select to zoom in
2 Select to zoom out
3 Select to reset view

1
2
3

28 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the alarms page has an
outline that changes color to show the current active alarm status.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 29

Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Help Button
Press the help button on the faceplates to access help specific to that faceplate. The help file
is in .pdf format and opens in a separate window. See the following example:

30 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Quick Display Interaction A Quick Display is a simplified faceplate that is designed for the Operator role and includes the
most common actions that are required by an operator. From the Quick Display, Select the
Home button to navigate to the faceplate for full access for operation, maintenance, and
configuration. All other buttons function the same as on the main faceplate. The following
figures show examples of quick displays.

Define Global Parameters The global parameters position the faceplate display on the screen. When you add a global
object to your display, you specify the tag and display characteristics in the Global Parameters
Value dialog.

In the Graphics editor, on a graphic display, right-click a reference object and select Global
Object Parameter Values. You can also select Edit > Global Object Parameter Values on the
menu
The Global Object Parameter Values menu item is unavailable if:
• The object that is selected is not a reference object.
• The object that is selected is a reference object but its base object has no global
object parameters defined.
• The object that is selected is part of a group reference object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 31

Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

Row Name Value Description

1 #102 Use … to select the tag needed Tag for the global object
Additional display parameter (for example, /X100 or /CC)
(optional)
2 #120 X-axis /X100 (have to have a Y)
/RP for relative position
/CC for centered
Additional display parameter (for example, /Y100)
(optional)
3 #121 Y-axis /Y100
Leave blank if use /RP or /CC in row 2
0 = Always show Faceplate
1 = Show Quick Display for users without security codes
that are specified in the HMI tag Security\ShowFaceplate
This allows the developer to configure which display
4 #122 Faceplate shows up depending on the user’s security level. By
default the value is “CDE” (meaning users with security
code C, D, or E will see the full faceplate and all other
users see the Quick Display.)
2 = Always Show Quick Display

You can enter any valid FactoryTalk View SE settings; see the display options online help for
more information. There are more options than described above, such as a specific quadrant
or /X and /Y coordinates.

Define HMI Text The HMI Text functions in the same way as in FactoryTalk View SE. See Define HMI Text on
page 32.This screen shows default values for a PPID instruction.

Define Navigation to Other Use the Navigation tab on the instruction Properties dialog box to configure navigation from
the HMI to additional devices or destinations (only some instructions have this as an option).
Object Faceplates

32 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

This screen shows default values for a PPID instruction in the default PPID control strategy.

1. To allow navigation to a destination from the HMI faceplate, select Allow navigation for
each destination.
2. In the Object tag name box, enter the controller path and the destination tag. For
example, the object tag name for an Input PV object could be
/DataServer::[shortcut name]tag name

Configure Faceplate On the FactoryTalk View SE Client Display:

Behavior While Operating 1. From the display, select the object.

2. Select > > >

3. Define characteristics

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 33

Chapter 2 FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates

34 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 3

FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

The library comes with faceplates for use with FactoryTalk® Optix™ for the following firmware
instructions: PDI, PDO, PD4SD, PAI, PAID, PAO, PDBC, PDOSE, PHLS, PPID, PMTR, PRT, PVSD, PVLV,
PVLVS, PINTLK, PPERM. FactoryTalk Optix content for other library instructions will be added in
a future release.
Faceplate Type Description
The basic faceplate has the operator controls and the most common maintenance
Faceplate controls, such as diagnostics, bypassing interlocks, and adjusting failure times and
analog alarm / control thresholds.
The Advanced faceplate has the remaining (less common) maintenance controls and
ALL the engineering configuration items, such as scaling, clamping, and major device
Advanced options (for example, motor-operated or solenoid-operated valve). It gets most of its
use during commissioning or if a device is replaced and the replacement has a
different configuration.

Before you work with faceplates, confirm you have the following:
• Controller project
• Configured the controller references in the project properties
• The base project is configured and objects being used are copied into the target project

IMPORTANT PlantPAx® faceplates in FactoryTalk Optix require the use of a subset of

OptixPanel™ hardware. Supported models are documented in the
following table.
Optix Panel Type Display Size
10.1” W 1280x800
12.1“ W 1280x800
OptixPanel Standard - Widescreen 15.6“ W 1920x1080
18.5“ W 1920x1080
21.5“ W 1920x1080
12.1“ 4:3 1024x768
OptixPanel Standard - 4:3
15” 4:3 1024x768

Basic Faceplate Attributes Faceplates consist of multiple tabs. The Operator (Home) tab is displayed when the faceplate
is initially opened. The faceplate provides the means for operators, maintenance personnel,
engineers, and others to interact with an instruction instance, which includes a view of its
status and values. Faceplates also manipulate an instruction through its commands and
settings. Select the appropriate icon on the left of the faceplate to access a specific tab. This
section provides an overview of the faceplate attributes that are common across the objects.
More details are supplied in the individual section for each object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 35

Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

Operator Tab

6 7 8
Item Action
1 Select to open the operator tab.
1 9 2 Select to open the maintenance tab.
2 3 Select to open the diagnostics tab.
3 4 Select to open the alarm tab.
4
If the object is configured to have permissive and interlock objects (for example,
Cfg_HasPermObj (Fast or Slow) or Cfg_HasIntlkObj is true), the permissive and
interlock indication become buttons. These buttons open the faceplates of the
5 source objects that are used as a permissive or interlock. Often this is a PPERM or
PINTLK instruction. If the object is not configured in this way, the permissive or
interlock symbols are indicators only.
5 6 Select to open the trends tab.
7 Select to navigate to an object with more information.
8 Select to open the Help file.
9 Select to reset and acknowledge all alarms.

Maintenance Tab

1 Item Description
1 Select to open Advanced Properties.
2 Select the dropdown arrows to open content blocks.
2

Advanced Properties Tab

3 4 5 6
Item Description
1 1 Select to open the Advanced Maintenance tab.
2 Device description that shows on the faceplate title bar.
2
3 Select to open the Advanced Engineering tab.
7
8 4 Select to open the Advanced Command Source tab.
9
5 Select to open the HMI Configuration tab.
6 Select to open the Advanced Alarm Configuration tab.
7 Label to show on the graphic symbol.
8 Tag name that shows on the faceplate.
9 Area name for security.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help prevent device
problems. These problems can include specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device
warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.

Trends Display
The Trends display shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate trends
provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but not replace, dedicated
historical or live trend displays.

Item Description
1 Select to zoom in/out.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 37

Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the alarms page has an
outline that changes color to show the current active alarm status.

Advanced Alarms Tab

The Advanced Alarm Configuration tab has settings that are common for all objects with
alarms. Each alarm instance uses a common configuration widget to configure the alarm.

Advanced Command Source Configuration Tab

The Command Source configuration tab has settings that are common for all objects with
Command Source. The “Command Source Exceptions” area has different exceptions for each

38 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

object that is specific to the objects commands and settings. See the following diagram for
common attributes of the Command Source configuration tab.

Help Button
The help button functions in the same way as in FactoryTalk View SE. See Help Button on
page 30.

Graphic Symbol Properties The Graphic Symbol properties connect a graphic symbol instance to a controller instance and
define the appearance of the symbol. When you add a graphic symbol to your display, you need
to specify the tags in the properties panel.

Define HMI Text The HMI Text functions in the same way as in FactoryTalk View SE. See Define HMI Text on
page 32.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 39

Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

Define Navigation to Other Navigation to other faceplates functions in the same way as in FactoryTalk View SE.
See Define Navigation to Other Object Faceplates on page 32.
Object Faceplates

40 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 41

Chapter 3 FactoryTalk Optix Faceplates

42 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 4

Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

The library comes with faceplates for use with Studio 5000 View Designer® displays. These
displays are for use with PanelView™ 5000 series HMI Terminals.
Faceplate Type Description
The basic faceplate has the operator controls and the most common maintenance
Faceplate controls, such as diagnostics, bypassing interlocks, and adjusting failure times and
analog alarm / control thresholds.

Before you work with faceplates, confirm you have the following:
• Controller project
• Configured the controller references in the project properties
• The base project is configured and objects being used are copied into the target project

Knowledgebase Technote, PlantPAx System Release 5.30

Configuration and Implementation Tools, contains recommended
FactoryTalk® Security policy settings for PlantPAx® systems.
Download the spreadsheet from this public article.

Sign in to your Rockwell Automation web account or create an

account if you do not have one. You do not need a support contract to
access the article.

IMPORTANT Advanced Properties are not accessible from the Studio 5000 View
Designer faceplates. Access to Advanced Properties is only available in
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application or with a parallel
instantiation of the instruction in FactoryTalk View SE.

IMPORTANT PlantPAx faceplates in View Designer require the use of 2715P

PanelView™ 5510 Terminals. The PanelView 5310 is not recommended.

Basic Faceplate Attributes Faceplates consist of tabs, and each tab consists of one or more pages. The Operator (Home)
tab is displayed when the faceplate is initially opened. The faceplate provides the means for
operators, maintenance personnel, engineers, and others to interact with an instruction
instance, which includes a view of its status and values. Faceplates also manipulate an
instruction through its commands and settings. Select the appropriate icon on the left of the
faceplate to access a specific tab. This section provides an overview of the faceplate
attributes that are common across the objects. More details are supplied in the individual
section for each object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 41

Chapter 4 Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

Operator Tab

Item Action
1 6
1 Select to open the operator tab.
2
2 Select to open the maintenance tab.
3 3 Select to open the trends tab.
4 4 Select to open the diagnostics tab.
5 5 Select to open the alarm tab.
6 Select to reset and acknowledge all alarms.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Page identifiers

Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help prevent device
problems. These problems can include specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device
warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data.
The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 4 Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

Trends Tab
The Trends display shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate trends
provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but not replace, dedicated
historical or live trend displays.

Item Description
Select this to pause the trend display. Select again to resume the trend display
1 at the current time.

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the alarms page has an
outline that changes color to show the current active alarm status.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 43

Chapter 4 Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

The Add-on Graphic (AOG) binding parameters connect to controller instance and define the
blink rate for alarm indication. When you add an AOG to your display, you specify the tags in
the proprieties panel.

In the graphics editor, after adding the appropriate AOG, select the AOG object. Right-click a
reference object and select Properties to edit the binding tags.
Row Binding Name Typical User Value Description
1 BlinkMedium ::Local:HMIDevice.Display.BlinkMedium Blink rate used for alarm animation.
Process Library Object tag for the add-on
2 ObjectName ::ControllerReference.ObjectTag graphic.

Define HMI Text The HMI Text functions in the same way as in FactoryTalk View SE. See Define HMI Text on
page 32.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 4 Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

This screen shows default values for a PPID instruction.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 45

Chapter 4 Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplates

Notes:

46 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5

Process Analog Input (PAI)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer Description
Symbol Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAI PAI_GS GS_PAI
Standard analog-input graphic symbol

GO_PAI_Trend

Analog input with a trend of the Process Variable and limits

— — (highhigh, high, low, and low-low).

GO_PAI_Indicator GS_PAI_Indicator

Process Variable indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

— display includes limits that are displayed with filled bars.

GO_PAI_IndicatorWCapture GS_PAI_IndicatorWCapture

This object is the same as GO_PAI_Indicator plus a light gray

— minimum/maximum capture area.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 47

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer Description
Symbol Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAI_TrendWCapture

Analog Input with Trend of Process Variable and limits (high-high,

— —
high, low, and low-low) plus a light gray capture area.

PAI_GS_TrendWTarget
GO_PAI_Adv_Trend

— This graphic symbol includes a trend with target lines.

PAI_GS_LinearGauge

GO_PAI_AdvIndicator GS_PAI_AdvIndicator

A moving triangle indicates the process variable. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bars plus a cyan
target range (for deviations).

The Optix graphic symbol has optional configuration to show or

hide the target and the capture area

GO_PAI_AdvIndicatorWCapture GS_PAI_AdvIndicatorWCapture

A moving triangle indicates the process variable. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bars plus a cyan
— target range (for deviations) and a light gray minimum/maximum
capture area.

GO_PAI_L1_
— — Displays the process variable value with alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_PV
— — Displays the process variable value.

GO_PAI_L1_PV1
— — Displays the process variable value.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer Description
Symbol Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAI_L1_Label
— — Label only. This excludes the process variable value.

GO_PAI_L1_Indicator

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

— — display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. Includes
alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_HIndicator

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

— — display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. Includes
alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_IndicatorS

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

— — display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. Includes
alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_HIndicatorS
Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic
— — display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. Includes
alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_BarWAlm

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip. Includes alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_HBarWAlm
Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic
display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip. Includes alarm indication.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 49

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer Description
Symbol Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAI_L1_BarWAlmS

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

— — display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip. Includes alarm indication.

GO_PAI_L1_HBarWAlmS Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip. Includes alarm indication.
GO_PAI_L1_Bar

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip.

GO_PAI_L1_BarS

Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip.

GO_PAI_L1_HBar Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip.
GO_PAI_L1_HBarS Process variable that is indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic
display includes limits that are displayed with filled bar. The
— — process variable value or EU are not displayed, but can be found in
the tooltip.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer Description
Symbol Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAI_Trend1
PAI_GS_TrendWLimits

Trend of process variable that includes limits (high-high, high, low,

and low-low) plus a light gray capture area. Includes alarm
indication.
—
The Optix graphic symbol includes optional configuration to show or
hide the capture area.

GO_PAI_HistTrend

Trend of historical process variable values. Analog limits are not

— — included.

GO_PAI_HistTrend1

Trend of historical process variable values. Analog limits are not

— — included.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 51

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Operator Tab

5
6
1

7
2

3 8
4

Item Description
1 High Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
2 Low Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
3 The rate of change bar graph (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
4 The rate of change value (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
5 Control High-High limit
6 Control High limit
7 Process Variable target
8 Reset Rate of Change value to zero

Maintenance Tab

2 3 4

Item Description
1 Use Substitute PV: Select to input a substitute process variable.
Select to display smart device object. See Process Analog HART (PAH) on
2 page 71.
3 Enter the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each alarm limit. Deadband
helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
4 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once
the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall
below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

2 3
Item Description
1 Out of Range (Fail) low and high threshold values.
2 Process variable deviation low and high threshold values.
Deadband associated with each threshold. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that
3 is applied to each limit.

3
Item Description
Process variable high rate of change threshold value. There is an alarm that is
1 associated with this configuration. The deadband can be configured in the
advanced maintenance settings.
Process variable clamping low and high threshold values. Any process variable
1 2 below the low value or above the high value will be held at the low or high value
respectively.
Deadband associated with each threshold. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that
3
2 is applied to each limit.

2 3
Item Description
Process variable control condition high high, high, low, and low low threshold
1 values.
2 Process variable deviation low and high threshold values.
Deadband associated with each threshold. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that
3 is applied to each limit.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 53

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter the amount of time the input must stay within the range thresholds (with deadband)
1 1 to clear the Out of Range (fail) condition. The off-delay time is used to help prevent a
chattering fail detection on a noisy signal near a range threshold.
2 Enter the amount of time the input must stay beyond a range threshold to cause an Out of
2 Range (fail) condition. The on-delay time is used to avoid an unnecessary fail detection
3 when the input only momentarily exceeds the threshold.
Enter the amount of time the input must remain unchanged to trigger a stuck input
3 condition. A value of zero means that the input must change every instruction scan to
avoid a stuck input condition. Enter a large value to disable stuck input detection.
Process variable clamping configuration. This includes the clamping low and high
4 threshold values and the clamping deadband.

Item Description
1 Process variable high high, high, low, and low low threshold gate delay (seconds).
2 Process variable high and low deviation threshold gate delay (seconds).
3 Process variable high rate of change threshold gate delay (seconds).
4 Process variable out of range threshold gate delay (seconds).
1

54 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
Input (unscaled) minimum and maximum
These parameters must be set to the range of the signal that is connected to the
Inp_Process Variable Input. The raw minimum default is 0.0 and the raw maximum
1 default is 100.0.
1 4 Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin
to 4.0 and Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The raw minimum/maximum and engineering
2 5 units minimum/maximum are used for scaling to engineering units.
3 2 Enter the Raw Input units to display on the HMI.
PV scaling type selection. Square root can be configured for differential pressure
3 applications.
EU minimum and maximum for scaling
These parameters must be set to match the Process Variable range of the input
signal that is connected to Inp_PV. The Process Variable engineering units
minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable engineering units maximum is
4 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -
50…+250 °C, set Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEU maximum to 250.0.
The raw minimum/maximum and Process Variable engineering units minimum/
maximum are used for scaling to engineering units.
5 Enter engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.

Item Description
Process variable substitution is allowed or not allowed. The substitute PV allows for an
1
1
entry of the PV from the HMI, which overrides the read PV.
2 Select to enable process variable target calculations, display, and alarms.
2 3 Select to enable Rate of Change target calculations, display, and alarms.
3 4 Process variable rate of change configuration.
Configure if the virtual and substitute process variables track the active process
5
4 variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 55

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Item Description
1 Configure if object fails on uncertain signal quality
1 2 Filter cutoff frequency. rad/s
3 Filter configuration: no filter, 1st order, 2nd order
2 Process variable replacement value for when the action is "Replace". There are multiple
4 action configurations. For example, if the Channel Fault action is configured to
3 “Replace”, this replace value is used in the event of a channel fault.
5 Enable or disable virtual mode

56 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9

Item Description Item Description

Action: Action:
When the P_AInChan configuration is not valid: When the input is out of range:
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
1 5
Quality: Quality:
When the P_ configuration is not valid: When the input is out of range:
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad
Action: Action:
When there is a channel fault: Use the input to determine value
Use the input to determine value Hold value at its last good value
Hold value at its last good value Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
2 6 Quality:
Quality: When the input is out of spec:
When there is a channel fault: Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVBad
Set Sts_PVBad
Action: Action:
When there is a module fault: When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
3 7
Quality: Quality:
When there is a module fault: When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 57

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Item Description Item Description

Action:
Action: When the input is stuck
When the input is not a number: (no change):
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
4 8
Quality: Quality:
When the input is not a number: When the input is stuck
Set Sts_PVGood (no change):
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad
Action:
When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
9 N/A N/A
Quality:
When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.
2 Select to allow navigation to SMART device object.
3 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
4 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1

58 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
1 1 after an operator resets the captured minimum and maximum values.
2 Select to configure if a Historical data source will be used or not.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
3 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.
2

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object.
2 Select to enable navigation to a downstream analog input object.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 59

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Any feature that is contained in the Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates has the same
functionality as used in the FactoryTalk® View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplates on page 51 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

60 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 35 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

1 6

7
2

3 8
4

Item Description
1 High Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
2 Low Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
3 The rate of change bar graph (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
4 The rate of change value (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
5 Control High-High limit
6 Control High limit
7 Process Variable target
8 Reset Rate of Change value to zero

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 61

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Maintenance Tab - PV Limits

1 2 3
Item Description
Select to display smart device object. Refer to Process Analog HART (PAH)
1 section.
2 Enter the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each limit.
Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious
alarms.
3 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5,
once the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must
fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
Process variable high rate of change threshold value. There is an alarm that
4 is associated with this configuration. The deadband can be configured in the
advanced maintenance settings.
5 Out of Range (Fail) low and high threshold values.

Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits

1 2
Item Description
1 Process variable deviation low and high threshold values.
Deadband associated with each threshold. Enter the deadband (hysteresis)
2 that is applied to each limit.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Maintenance Tab - Clamping Limits

Item Description
Process variable clamping low and high threshold values. Any process
1 variable below the low value or above the high value will be held at the
low or high value respectively.

Maintenance Tab - Control Limits

2 3

Item Description
Process variable control condition high high, high, low, and low low threshold
1 values.
2 Process variable deviation low and high threshold values.
Deadband associated with each threshold. Enter the deadband (hysteresis)
3 that is applied to each limit.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 63

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Maintenance Tab - Use Substitute PV

Item Description
1 Use Substitute PV: Select to input a substitute process variable.

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers

Item Description
Enter the amount of time the input must stay within the range thresholds (with
1 deadband) to clear the Out of Range (fail) condition. The off-delay time is used to help
1 prevent a chattering fail detection on a noisy signal near a range threshold.
Enter the amount of time the input must stay beyond a range threshold to cause an Out
2 2 of Range (fail) condition. The on-delay time is used to avoid an unnecessary fail
detection when the input only momentarily exceeds the threshold.
3 Enter the amount of time the input must remain unchanged to trigger a stuck input
3 condition. A value of zero means that the input must change every instruction scan to
avoid a stuck input condition. Enter a large value to disable stuck input detection.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Clamp Limits

Item Description
Process variable clamping configuration. This includes the clamping low and high
1 threshold values and the clamping deadband.
1

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Threshold Gate Delay

Item Description
1 Process variable high high, high, low, and low low threshold gate delay (seconds).
2 Process variable high and low deviation threshold gate delay (seconds).
3 Process variable high rate of change threshold gate delay (seconds).
4 Process variable out of range threshold gate delay (seconds).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 65

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Raw Input Scaling

1 2
Item Description
Input (unscaled) minimum and maximum.
These parameters must be set to the range of the signal that is connected to the
Process Variable Input. The raw minimum default is 0.0 and the raw maximum default
1 is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin to
4.0 and Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The raw minimum/maximum and engineering units
minimum/maximum are used for scaling to engineering units.
EU minimum and maximum for scaling.
These parameters must be set to match the Process Variable range of the input signal
3 that is connected to Inp_PV. The Process Variable engineering units minimum default
is 0.0 and the Process Variable engineering units maximum is 100.0.
2 Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents - 50…+250
°C, set Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEUMax to 250.0. The raw minimum/maximum
and Process Variable engineering units minimum/ maximum are used for scaling to
engineering units.
PV scaling type selection. Square root can be configured for differential pressure
3 applications.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features

Item Description
Process variable substitution is allowed or not allowed. The substitute PV allows for an
1 entry of the PV from the HMI, which overrides the read PV.
1 2 Select to enable process variable target calculations, display, and alarms.
3 Select to enable Rate of Change target calculations, display, and alarms.
2
4 Process variable rate of change configuration.
3 5 Filter configuration: no filter, 1st order, 2nd order.
6 Filter cutoff frequency (rad/s).
4

66 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior

Item Description
Configure if the virtual and substitute process variables track the active process
1 variable.
2 Configure if object fails on uncertain signal quality.
3 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 67

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced Engineering Tab - PV Actions on Exceptions

2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10

Item Description Item Description

Action:
When the input is out of range:
Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value
Process variable replacement value for when the action is Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
"Replace". There are multiple action configurations. For example,
1 6
if the Channel Fault action is configured to "Replace", this
Quality:
replace value is used in the event of a channel fault. When the input is out of range:
Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad
Action: Action:
When the configuration is not valid: When the input is out of spec:
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
2 7
Quality: Quality:
When the configuration is not valid: When the input is out of spec:
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad
Action: Action:
When there is a channel fault: When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
3 8
Quality: Quality:
When there is a channel fault: When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad

68 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Item Description Item Description

Action: Action:
When there is a module fault: When the input is stuck (no change):
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
4 9
Quality: Quality:
When there is a module fault: When the input is stuck (no change):
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad
Action: Action:
When the input is not a number: When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
Use the input to determine value Use the input to determine value
Hold value at its last good value Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal
5 10
Quality: Quality:
When the input is not a number: When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
Set Sts_PVGood Set Sts_PVGood
Set Sts_PVUncertain Set Sts_PVUncertain
Set Sts_PVBad Set Sts_PVBad

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision

Item Description
1 Display the engineering units for PV values.
2 Display the engineering units for RAW values.
3 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.
1
2
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 69

Chapter 5 Process Analog Input (PAI)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object.
2 Select to enable navigation to a downstream analog input object.
3 Select to allow navigation to SMART device object.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
4
1
This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

3
4

70 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 6

Process Analog HART (PAH)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
Graphic Symbol Name Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol

GO_PAH

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

PAH faceplates are accessed via the smart device button on the maintenance page of the PAI
instruction.

Smart Device Operator

Item Description
1 Show Process Variable for the HART PV.
2 Show Process Variable for the HART SV
1 3
3 Show Process Variable for the HART TV.
2 4 4 Show Process Variable for the HART QV.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 71

Chapter 6 Process Analog HART (PAH)

Smart Device Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Display the description for the device.
2 Display the tag name for the device.
1
3 Display digital HART value for loop current in milliamps.
2

Smart Device Engineering Tab

Item Description
Select to display the digital variables’ (PV, SV, TV, FV) status as received via HART. Clear
1
1 this checkbox to disable automatic updating of HART device information.
2 Select to use HART communication status to generate SrcQ, 0 - assume good.
2 Display analog input unscaled signal maximum, minimum, and units from HART module
3 (in module units).
Display analog input scaled signal maximum, minimum, and units from HART module
4 (in module units).
3 4

72 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 6 Process Analog HART (PAH)

Smart Device HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Select to display text received from HART device, 0 = use extended properties for text.
1 2 Display the text to display the units of measure for variable HART PV, SV, TV, and QV.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
3 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
2
Instruction and Library defined.

Smart Device Diagnostics

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help prevent device
problems. These problems can include specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device
warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 73

Chapter 6 Process Analog HART (PAH)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Graphic Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 71 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

74 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 7

Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk VIew SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAID PAID_GS GS_PAID

Standard analog-input graphic symbol

PAID_GS_Indicator
GO_PAID_Indicator GS_PAID_Indicator

Process Variable indicated by a moving triangle. The

graphic display includes limits that are displayed with filled
bars.

GO_PAID_Trend PAID_GS_Trend

Analog input with a trend of the Process Variable and limits

— (highhigh, high, low, and low-low).

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 75

Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Select Sensor A Input Process Variable.
2 Select the average of Sensor A and Sensor B input Process Variables.
4
3 Select Sensor B Input Process Variable.
4 Select the maximum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
5 Select the minimum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
5

1 2 3

Maintenance Tab
1

Item Description
Process variable high/low signal difference threshold. Enter the threshold (trip
1 point) for analog input alarms.
Process variable deadband. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to the
alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous
2 spurious alarms.
2 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once
the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below
85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
3
Process variable fail deadband. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to
4
each alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating
numerous spurious alarms.
3 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once
the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below
85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
4 Process variable fail threshold in raw units.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Configure the signal difference gate delay (seconds), which is the time after the gate
1 input activates before the threshold detection is enabled
1

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Minimum and maximum scale for the process variable on the trend.
1 PV Source and Quality Input A
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using
Inp_PVBad, Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)
2
2 Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and
Quality (SrcQ) value that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via
Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source and quality.
PV Source and Quality Input B
3 Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using
Inp_PVBad, Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)
3
Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and
Quality (SrcQ) value that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via
Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source and quality.
4
Allows any combination of the operator, program, or external sources to select the
4 active process variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 77

Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
Enter the name for Input Tag A to show on the faceplate and Tooltip.
1 IMPORTANT: Hover the pointing device over the field to display a tool tip with the
configured Logix tag/path.
Enter the name for Input Tag B to show on the faceplate and Tooltip.
2 IMPORTANT: Hover the pointing device over the field to display a tool tip with the
configured Logix tag/path.
3 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.
1
4 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2
5 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
3
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
6
4
This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.
5

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
1
1 any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object.
2 The tagname to navigate to is shown in the box under the checkbox label.
Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object.
3 The tagname to navigate to is shown in the box under the checkbox label.
Select to enable to a downstream analog input object. The tagname to navigate to is
4 shown in the box under the checkbox label.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 75 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 79

Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 75 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Select Sensor A Input Process Variable.
2 Select the average of Sensor A and Sensor B input Process Variables.
4
3 Select Sensor B Input Process Variable.
4 Select the maximum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
5 Select the minimum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
5

1 2 3

Maintenance Tab

1
Item Description
Process variable high/low signal difference threshold. Enter the threshold (trip
1 point) for analog input alarms.
Process variable high/low signal difference deadband. Enter the deadband
(hysteresis) that is applied to the alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy
signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
2
2 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once
the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall
below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
Process variable fail deadband. Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied
3 to each alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating
numerous spurious alarms.
4 3 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once
the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall
below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
4 Process variable fail threshold in raw units.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Configure the signal difference gate delay (seconds), which is the time after the gate
1 input activates before the threshold detection is enabled
1

Advanced Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 1 Minimum and maximum scale for the process variable on the trend.
PV Source and Quality Input A
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality
using Inp_PVBad, Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or
not a number)
2
2 Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the
Source and Quality (SrcQ) value that is provided by an upstream object (such
as PAI) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source and quality.
PV Source and Quality Input B
3 Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality
using Inp_PVBad, Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or
not a number)
3
Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the
4 Source and Quality (SrcQ) value that is provided by an upstream object (such
as PAI) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source and quality.
Allows any combination of the operator, program, or external sources to
4 select the active process variable.

HMI Configuration Tab - Identification

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 81

Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Item Description
1 Name for Input Tag A to show on the faceplate.
2 Name for Input Tag B to show on the faceplate.

1
2

HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision

Item Description
1 Display the text of the units for the Process Variable.
2 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.
1
2

82 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object. The tagname to
1 navigate to is shown in the box under the label.
Select to enable navigation to an upstream analog input object. The tagname to
2 navigate to is shown in the box under the label.
Select to enable to a downstream analog input object. The tagname to navigate to is
3 shown in the box under the label.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
1 to true.)
4 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
2 Instruction and Library defined.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 83

Chapter 7 Process Dual Sensor Analog Input (PAID)

Notes:

84 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 8

Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Graphic

GO_PAIM Standard analog-input graphic symbol.

The object displays four inputs (A-D), with each input a moving
GO_PAIM_4V — line on a horizontal axis. The graphic display includes
indicators for disabled and rejected inputs.

The object displays six inputs (A-F), with each input a moving
GO_PAIM_6V — line on a horizontal axis. The graphic display includes
indicators for disabled and rejected inputs.

The object displays eight inputs (A-H), with each input a

GO_PAIM_8V — moving line on a horizontal axis. The graphic display includes
indicators for disabled and rejected inputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 85

Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Studio 5000 View Designer

Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Graphic

The object displays eight inputs (A-H), with each input a

GO_PAIM_8H — moving line on a vertical axis. The graphic display includes
indicators for disabled and rejected inputs.

Process Variable indicated by a moving triangle. The graphic

GO_PAIM_Indicator display includes limits that are displayed with filled bars.

Analog input with a trend of the Process Variable and limits

GO_PAIM_Trend — (highhigh, high, low, and low-low).

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Process Variable

86 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Maintenance Tab

1 2

Item Description
1 Failure status high/low threshold.
2 Failure status high/low threshold.
Sensor Inputs. Select:
• ON if the corresponding input is to be used to calculate the final Process Variable
(average or median).
3 • OFF to exclude the corresponding input from the Process Variable calculation.
This configuration is typically used to exclude a particular input when it is taken out of
service for maintenance. If the P_AInMulti instruction has a Process Variable but is not
using it, the Maintenance Bypass Indicator is displayed.

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Minimum and maximum scale for the process variable on the trend.
1 Select to set this parameter:
• ON, if the corresponding Process Variable Input is to be used to calculate final
Process Variable (average or median)
2 • OFF, to exclude the corresponding Process Variable Input from the Process Variable
2
calculation
TIP: This configuration determines whether a particular input is intended to be wired
and used. See the Maintenance tab for functions to take an input out of service for
maintenance temporarily.
3 Enter the number of selected inputs that must have a good source quality to result in
3 a good Process Variable.
4 Select to set this parameter to one of the following:
• ON, an input that is flagged as uncertain is rejected and not used to calculate the
5 final Process Variable.
4
• OFF, an input that is flagged as uncertain is not rejected and is still used to
calculate the final Process Variable. The flag causes the final Process Variable to
be flagged as uncertain (default).
Select:
• 'Outside of rejection region' to reject an input that is more than two standard
deviations from the mean.
5 • 'Outside of mean +/-' to reject an input that deviates from the mean by more than
the value entered. Value is in PV engineering units.
IMPORTANT: At least four inputs must be used for the 'Outside of rejection region'
selection to be meaningful.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 87

Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Item Description
Select:
1 • 'Average of good inputs' - the calculated final Process Variable is the average
(arithmetic mean) of the good (non-rejected) Process Variable inputs.
1 • 'Median of good inputs' - the calculated final Process Variable is the median (central
value) of the good (non-rejected) Process Variable inputs (default).
2 The average is the sum of values that are divided by the number of values.
The median is the value of the item in the middle. If there are an even number of items,
the median is the average of the two central values.
Select one of the options to determine the output calculation when there are only two
2 unrejected inputs.

Item Description
Select either generate or pass thru source quality for each channel. If the channel
1 1 is configured to pass thru, the PV source quality will not be impacted by that
channel source quality.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the unit measurements.
2 Enter the Input tag names.
3 Enter the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1 Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
3 after any operator command.
2
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
3 set
4 to true.)
This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 89

Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Item Description
1 1 Enter the object to navigate to for each input.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 86 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 91

Chapter 8 Process Multi Sensor Analog Input (PAIM)

Notes:

92 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9

Process Analog Output (PAO)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PAO PAO_GS_Analog_Output GS_PAO

Standard analog-output graphic symbol.

GO_PAO_ControlValve PAO_GS_ControlValve GS_PAO_ControlValve

Normal controlled valve symbol for horizontal pipe.

GO_PAO_ControlValve1 PAO_GS_ControlValve_B GS_PAO_ControlValve2

Inverted controlled valve symbol for horizontal pipe.

PAO_GS_ControlValve_L
GO_PAO_ControlValve2 GS_PAO_ControlValve3

Controlled valve symbol for vertical pipe (pipe to the left.)

PAO_GS_ControlValve_R
GO_PAO_ControlValve3 GS_PAO_ControlValve4
Controlled valve symbol for vertical pipe (pipe to the
right).

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 93

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Analog Output State (At Target, Ramping Down, Ramping Up, Clamped at Min,
1
2
Clamped at Max, or Disabled).
3 2 Control Variable.
3 Control Variable target.
4 Enter to change the Controlled Variable output value.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select box to indicate that there is a closed limit switch feedback reference.
1
1 Uncheck if a reference does not exist.
Select box to indicate that there is an opened limit switch feedback reference.
2 2 Uncheck if a reference does not exist.
3 Select box to indicate that there is a feedback reference. Uncheck if a
3 reference does not exist.
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Select
4 No to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.
Enter the position (PV value) above which the device (valve) is assumed to be
5 open if the feedback from Opened limit switch is not used.

4 5

94 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Controlled Variable clamp limits. Enter the clamping limits for the Controlled
3 1 Variable in engineering units.
Clamp limits are enforced in Operator and Program command sources only.
1
Enter the maximum allowed value for the Rate of Change Limit in engineering
2 units per second.
A value of zero allows any rate of change to be input by the Program or Operator.
4 Enter the Operator command source Controlled Variable Target in engineering
units.
3 This entry is available in Operator command source and Maintenance command
5 source.
Select and the Controlled Variable holds at the last good value when an Interlock
trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
4
2 Clear this checkbox and the Controlled Variable goes to the Interlock Controlled
Variable value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
Enter the interlock target Controlled Variable in engineering units.
5 This value is used for the Controlled Variable when interlocked or on an I/O Fault,
but only if Hold Last Good Value is not selected.

Item Description
Enter the overall period for the open and close cycles. The open and close cycles
consist of a pulsed output and an idle time. If the total cycle time is 10 seconds and the
1 1 maximum output time is 5 seconds, the cycle is 5 seconds of pulsed output and 5
seconds of idle. The pulse cycles are only used if pulse outputs are enabled.
2
2 Enter the additional time to be added to the first pulse of an open or close action.
3
3 Maximum time the open or close pulse output is enabled during each cycle.
4
4 Minimum time the open or close pulse output is enabled during each cycle.
Enter the value for time the output is bumped for open or closed bump command by
5
5 the operator. When enabled, this is a one-time bump of the requested output.
Enter the value for the stuck alarm. When this time is reached without position change,
6 6 the status changes to stuck.
Enter value for the gate of the deviation alarm. If deviation is above the high limit or
7 7 below the low limit for this time, the deviation status is raised.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 95

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
Enter values for the maximum and minimum scaled (engineering units) scaling
1 ranges.
3 Select what method is used to determine the CV on power-up.
1 4 If use power-up DV is selected, enter the value for the initial CV used on power-
2 up.
Position feedback must be enabled to use the position feedback power-up
method.
3 Engineering Units label.
4 Enter values for the maximum and minimum output (Raw) scaling ranges.
2

Item Description
Select whether this method is used for opened and closed status. This is a cross-check
1 between the position and the opened/closed feedback.
1
2 Select whether the valve has closed feedback or not.
2
3 Select whether the valve has opened feedback or not.
Select whether the valve will fault when the opened and closed feedback inputs are both
3 4 ON or when they are both off.
4 5 Select whether the valve has position feedback (%) or not.
6 Select whether the valve has a pulsed output for opening and closing.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Item Description
When selected, the operator settings track the program settings when the command
1 source is Program, and program settings track the operator settings when the
1 command source is Operator. Transition between command sources is bumpless.
2 When not selected, the operator settings and program settings retain their values
regardless of command source. When the command source is changed, the value of a
3 limit can change, such as from the Program-set value to the Operator-set value.
When selected, the Program and Operator Settings of the CV track the output CV when
4 2 the command source is Hand or Override.
3 Select while in Override command source to bypass Interlocks that can be bypassed.
Select to have the CV immediately go to its target value or configured Interlock CV
value when an Interlock trips or the instruction is placed in Maintenance or Override
5 4 command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the CV always use rate of change limiting (ramping) of the
CV output.
Select so that an I/O Fault triggers a shed of the output, to the configured shed set
6 value or to hold last good output. The shed condition is latched internal to the Add-On
Instruction. When the I/O Fault condition clears, a Reset command is required to return
7 to normal operation.
5 Clear this checkbox so that the I/O Fault condition does not affect operation (but can
still generate an alarm).

The configured shed action always takes place on an interlock trip. This selection
cannot be changed.
Select this option to set the analog output to the configured shed set value when a
6 condition configured as a shed trigger occurs.
Select this option to hold the analog output at its last good value when a condition
7 configured as a shed trigger occurs.

Item Description
1 Enter the rate (%/sec) at which the the valve moves during opening and closing.
2 Select yes to enable Virtual.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 97

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Set the number of decimal places for the Control Variable.
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator
becomes a button that opens the P_Intlk faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk_0. For example, if your P_AOut object has the name
‘AOut123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘AOut123_Intlk_0’.
1 3 Select to enable navigation to a SMART device object.
2 4 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
5 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.
3

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
1
1 after any operator command.
2 Select to configure if a Historical data source will be used or not.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
3 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Item Description
Select to enable navigation to the faceplate for the PlantPAx® object that is providing
1
the position feedback for this object. Inp_PosFdbk
1 Select to enable navigation to the faceplate for the PlantPAx object that is providing
2 the CV for this object (PSet_CV).
2

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 99

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 93 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

100 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 93 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
Analog Output State (At Target, Ramping Down, Ramping Up, Clamped at
1 1 Min, Clamped at Max, or Disabled).
2 2 Control Variable.
3
3 Control Variable target.
4 Enter to change the Controlled Variable output value.

Maintenance Tab - Feedback Configuration

Item Description
Select box to indicate that a closed limit switch will be used for
1 feedback reference. Uncheck if a reference is not used.
Select box to indicate that an opened limit switch will be used for
1 2 feedback reference. Uncheck if a reference is not used.
2 Select box to indicate that a position feedback will be used for feedback
3
3 reference. Uncheck if a reference is not used.
Enter the position (PV value) above which the device (valve) is assumed
4
4 to be open if the feedback from Opened limit switch is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 101

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Maintenance Tab - CV

Item Description
Enter the CV active value. When Val_CVOut is greater than this value (CV
1 engineering units) set Sts_Active (for HMI).
2 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for increasing CV.
3 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for decreasing CV.
1

Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits

Item Description
1 Enter the Control Variable deviation low and high threshold values.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Maintenance Tab - Interlocks

Item Description
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and
1 permissives.
Select No to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Diagram

Item Description
Controlled Variable clamp limits. Enter the clamping limits for the
Controlled Variable in engineering units.
1 Clamp limits are enforced in Operator and Program command sources
3 only.
Enter the maximum allowed value for the Rate of Change Limit in
1 engineering units per second.
2 A value of zero allows any rate of change to be input by the Program or
Operator.
Enter the Operator command source Controlled Variable Target in
3 engineering units. This entry is available in Operator command source and
Maintenance command source.
4
Select and the Controlled Variable holds at the last good value when an
Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
4 Clear this checkbox and the Controlled Variable goes to the Interlock
5 Controlled Variable value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
Enter the interlock target Controlled Variable in engineering units.
5 This value is used for the Controlled Variable when interlocked or on an I/O
2 Fault, but only if Hold Last Good Value is not selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 103

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers

Item Description
Enter the overall period for the open and close cycles. The open and close cycles
consist of a pulsed output and an idle time. If the total cycle time is 10 seconds
1 and the maximum output time is 5 seconds, the cycle is 5 seconds of pulsed
output and 5 seconds of idle. The pulse cycles are only used if pulse outputs are
1 enabled.
2 Enter the additional time to be added to the first pulse of an open or close action.
2
3 Maximum time the open or close pulse output is enabled during each cycle.
3 4 Minimum time the open or close pulse output is enabled during each cycle.
Enter the value for time the output is bumped for open or closed bump command
4 5 by the operator. When enabled, this is a one-time bump of the requested output.
5
Enter the value for the stuck alarm. When this time is reached without position
6
6 change, the status changes to stuck.
Enter value for the gate of the deviation alarm. If deviation is above the high limit
7 7 or below the low limit for this time, the deviation status is raised.

Advanced Engineering Tab - CV Scaling

1 2 Item Description
Enter values for the maximum and minimum scaled (engineering units) scaling
1 ranges.
2 Enter values for the maximum and minimum output (Raw) scaling ranges.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features

Item Description
Select whether this method is used for opened and closed status. This is a
1 cross-check between the position and the opened/closed feedback.
2 Select whether the valve has closed feedback or not.
3 Select whether the valve has opened feedback or not.
1 Select whether the valve will fault when the opened and closed feedback
4 inputs are both ON or when they are both off.
2 5 Select whether the valve has position feedback (%) or not.
3 6 Select whether the valve has a pulsed output for opening and closing.
4

5
6

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior

Item Description
Select what method is used to determine the CV on power-up.
If use power-up CV is selected, enter the value for the initial CV used on power-
1 up. Position feedback must be enabled to use the position feedback power-up
method.
When selected, the operator settings track the program settings when the
command source is Program, and program settings track the operator settings
when the command source is Operator. Transition between command sources
1 2 is bumpless. When not selected, the operator settings and program settings
retain their values regardless of command source. When the command source
is changed, the value of a limit can change, such as from the Program-set value
to the Operator-set value.
When selected, the Program and Operator Settings of the CV track the output CV
3 when the command source is Hand or Override.
2 Select while in Override command source to bypass Interlocks that can be
4 bypassed.
3 Select to have the CV immediately go to its target value or configured Interlock
CV value when an Interlock trips or the instruction is placed in Maintenance or
4 5 Override command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the CV always use rate of change limiting (ramping)
5 of the CV output.
6 Select yes to enable Virtual.
6

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 105

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Shed Behavior

Item Description
1 Select to shed if a Device Fault is detected.
2 Select to shed if an I/O Fault is detected.
The device always sheds on Interlock not OK. This item cannot be unchecked. It
3 is displayed as a reminder that Interlock not OK always triggers a shed.
Select this option to set the analog output to the configured shed set value
4 when a condition configured as a shed trigger occurs.
Select this option to hold the analog output at its last good value when a
5 condition configured as a shed trigger occurs.
1
2
3

4
5

Advanced Engineering Tab - Rate Configuration

Item Description
1 Enter the rate (%/sec) at which the valve moves during opening and closing.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Display the engineering units for CV values.
2 Display the engineering units for Output raw values.
3 Set the number of decimal places for the Control Variable.
1 Select to enable navigation to the faceplate for the Process object that is providing the
4
2 position feedback for this object (Inp_PosFdbk).
Select to enable navigation to the faceplate for the Process object that is providing the
3 5 CV for this object (PSet_CV).
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator
becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
6 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_Intlk_0. For example, if your PAO object has the name ‘AOut123’,
4 then its Interlock object must be named ‘AOut123_Intlk_0’.
7 Select to enable navigation to a SMART device object.
5 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
8 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
6
Instruction and Library defined.
7

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 107

Chapter 9 Process Analog Output (PAO)

Notes:

108 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 10

Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol

Standard PBL object. Displays Boolean output status

GO_PBL and alarming. Opens faceplate.

Standard PBL object. Displays Boolean output status

GO_PBL1 and alarming.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 109

Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
1 2 3

Item Description
1 Input Name: Select to navigate to the Input object faceplate.
2 Gates: Select one of the gates to access the Gate Configuration display for that gate.
Select to take a snapshot of the current state.
3 IMPORTANT: When you take a snapshot, the View Snapshot tab is automatically displayed.
4 Boolean value that displays the final output of the PBL object.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

Maintenance Tab
1

Item Description
1 Enter a value for the off-delay time and the on-delay time.
2 Select to generate a time stamp whenever a snapshot triggers.
3 Select to allow a new snapshot to be triggered without a reset of the previous snapshot.
4 Select to trigger a snapshot when the designated condition is met.

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select to open the faceplate to select the output source.
2 Select to invert the selected output before it is passed to the output delay timers
1 3 Select to open the Gate Configuration faceplate.

2
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 111

Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the text to display on the faceplate when output = 0
2 Enter the text to display on the faceplate when output = 1
3 Enter a description for each input.

1
2

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
1 1 after any operator command.
2 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to input object.
1

Logic Gate Configuration

3 4 5

Item Description
1 Displays the gate being configured.
2 Select to select which inputs of the gate are enabled (1…4).
3 Select the inputs for the gate.
4 Select to invert the source that enters the gate.
5 Select to select a gate type.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 113

Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

View Snapshot
The View Snapshot tab shows an image of the Operator faceplate when the snapshot was
taken. The background of the display turns from gray to white to indicate capture. The View
Snapshot has the same functionality as the operator faceplate plus a Reset button.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 110 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

114 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

Maintenance Tab

View Snapshot
The View Snapshot tab shows an image of the Operator faceplate when the snapshot was
taken. The View Snapshot has the same functionality as the operator faceplate plus a Reset
button.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 115

Chapter 10 Process Boolean Logic (PBL)

Notes:

116 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 11

Process Command Source (PCMDSRC)

The PCMDSRC (Command Source) Instruction is used to provide selection of the command
source (owner) of an instruction or control strategy. This instruction excludes Graphic
Symbols.

The command source indicator displays by exception only. For example, if the device is
operating normally, there is not an indicator. If the device is out of service (OoS), then the OoS
indicator is displayed.

Command source indicators are not used for analog inputs.

Image Description

Device is out of service

Device is not in normal command source operation

Device is in program command source operation

Device is in maintenance command source operation

Device is in operator command source operation

Device is in override command source operation

Device is in local command source operation

Device is in external command source operation

Command Source Totem Pole

The Command Source Totem Pole shows the sources that have been requested. These sources
have a white background color. The leftmost source that is highlighted is the active command
source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 117

Chapter 11 Process Command Source (PCMDSRC)

In the example that follows, the current command source is Operator Locked. When Operator
Locked is released, the default command source is Operator. The small black triangle, in the
upper left corner of the operator indicator indicates the normal command source.

Operator Buttons
The Operator Lock buttons on device faceplates are used to lock and unlock Operator
command source. The buttons also show the current command source status.
Image Description

Select to request Operator command source.

Select to lock in Operator command source. The program cannot take control.

Select to request Program command source.

External Control
There is a slider on the operator page that allows the operator to place the device in External
Control.

118 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 11 Process Command Source (PCMDSRC)

Maintenance Buttons
The maintenance buttons on device faceplates are used to request and release Maintenance
command source.
Image Description

Select to acquire Maintenance command source.

Select to release Maintenance command source.

Select to display Advanced Properties command source.

Advanced Properties
Select the Advanced Properties button from the maintenance page to access the engineering
tabs. There are three engineering tabs. The first page is the configuration for the
Cfg_ProgDefault parameter for the object, which sets the default command source when no
command source is being requested.

From the other pages, you can configure the settings for additional command sources.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 119

Chapter 11 Process Command Source (PCMDSRC)

Notes:

120 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12

Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
Three/Four-Way Valve.
The Three/Four-way Valve parameters define the inlet and
output ports of the valve:
PD4SD_GS_4Way • No. 110 - Top port open state
GO_PD4SD_4Way PD4SD_GS_4Way_Valve
• No. 111 - Right port open state
• No. 112 - Bottom port open state
• No. 113 - Left port open state

• 0 = Inlet (always shown as open)

• 1 = Open when Val_Sts = 1 (state 0)
• 2 = Open when Val_Sts = 2 (state 1)
• 3 = Open when Val_Sts = 3 (state 2)
• 4 = Open when Val_Sts = 4 (state 3)
GO_PD4SD_3Way_SORt PD4SD_GS_3Way_L GS_PD4SD_3Way_SO_Rt

GO_PD4SD_3Way_SOLt PD4SD_GS_3Way_R GS_PD4SD_3Way_SO_Lt

Two-Way Solenoid-operated Diverter Valve in different

positions: right, left, bottom, and top.
Parameters define the inlet and output ports of the Two-way
GO_PD4SD_3Way_SOBtm PD4SD_GS_3Way_B GS_PD4SD_3Way_SO_Btm Solenoid-operated Diverter Valve.

The FactoryTalk Optix 3-way valve graphic symbols can be

configured to have either a Solenoid Actuator or a Motor
Operated Actuator. The ports are configurable to represent
an arc valve or a diverter valve
GO_PD4SD_3Way_SOTop GS_PD4SD_3Way_SO_Top
PD4SD_GS_3Way_T

PD4SD_GS_Diverter_L
GO_PD4SD_Diverter GS_PD4SD_Diverter
Two Way Diverter Valve in open top-left and open top-right
positions.
The Two-way Diverter Valve parameters define the state of
the valve:
GO_PD4SD_Diverter1 PD4SD_GS_Diverter_R GS_PD4SD_Diverter • State 0: Open top-left
• State 1: Open top-right
• State 2: —
• State 3: —

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 121

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PD4SD_3WayMO_Rt GS_PD4SD_3Way_MO_Rt

GO_PD4SD_3WayMO_Lt GS_PD4SD_3Way_MO_Lt

GO_PD4SD_3WayMO_Btm GS_PD4SD_3Way_MO_Btm Two-Way Motor-operated Diverter Valve in different

positions: right, left, bottom, and top.
— Parameters define the inlet and output ports of the Two-way
Motor-operated Diverter Valve.

GO_PD4SD_3WayMO_Top GS_PD4SD_3Way_MO_Top

GO_PD4SD_3WayArc_Rt

GO_PD4SD_3WayArc_Lt

GO_PD4SD_3WayArc_Btm Three-way arc valve in different positions: right, left, bottom,

— — and top. Parameters define the closed state of each port of
the three-way arc valve.

GO_PD4SD_3WayArc_Top

122 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PD4SD_R GS_PD4SD_R

GO_PD4SD_U PD4SD_GS_Motor_Rt GS_PD4SD_U

Motors in different positions: right, up, and down.

GO_PD4SD_D GS_PD4SD_D

GO_PD4SD_Blower_R GS_PD4SD_Blower_R

GO_PD4SD_Blower_L GS_PD4SD_Blower_L

PD4SD_GS_Blower_Rt

GO_PD4SD_Blower_U Blowers in different positions: right, left, up, and down.

GS_PD4SD_Blower_U

GO_PD4SD_Blower_D GS_PD4SD_Blower_D

GO_PD4SD_Conveyor_R GS_PD4SD_Conveyor_R

— Conveyor

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 123

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PD4SD_Inline_U GS_PD4SD_Inline_U

GO_PD4SD_Inline_L GS_PD4SD_Inline_L

PD4SD_GS_Inline_Motor

Inline Motors in different positions: up, left, down, and right.

GO_PD4SD_Inline_D GS_PD4SD_Inline_D

GO_PD4SD_Inline_R GS_PD4SD_Inline_R

GO_PD4SD_Pump_R GS_PD4SD_Pump_R

PD4SD_GS_Pumps_Rt GS_PD4SD_Pump_L
GO_PD4SD_Pump_L

Pumps in different positions: right, left, and up.

GO_PD4SD_Pump_U GS_PD4SD_Pump_U

GO_PD4SD_Agitator_D PD4SD_GS_Agitator GS_PD4SD_Agitator_D

Agitator in down position.

GO_PD4SD_Mixer_U GS_PD4SD_Mixer_U

— Mixer in up position.

124 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PD4SD_RPump_U GS_PD4SD_RPump_U

— Rotary Gear Pump in up position.

GO_PD4SD_Fan_D GS_PD4SD_Fan_D

— Fan in down position.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator command source.

Item Description
1 1 Device state indicator
2 Move to state command buttons

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 125

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Maintenance Tab
Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance tab to adjust
device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device problems, and disable the
device for routine maintenance.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings. The Advanced
Properties Display provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges, and
options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later
system changes.

Item Description
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to energize outputs
1 to the device to be sure that they are latched in.
(0 = output held continuously)
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to allow the device to
2 reach the commanded state before issuing a fault.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select the number of states.
1 Select a state to open the PD4SD State Configuration display for that state.

2
3

4 This display directs how the PD4SD instruction commands the device state via outputs
and determines the actual device state via feedback inputs. The first two columns for
5 output set parameters, Cfg_bSt[x]OutWrite, and Cfg_bSt[x]OutState, determine how
outputs are written to command to a state. The second two columns for feedback set
6 parameters, Cfg_bSt[x]FdbkCheck, and Cfg_bSt[x]FcbkState, determine how the state is
interpreted from the
7 input values.
3 Select to reset a fault upon a new operator command.
4 Select to reset a fault upon a new external command.
Select (= 1) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0) available in any command source.
5 Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0) available only in Operator
or Maintenance command source.
Select (= 1) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available in any command source.
6 Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available only in External
command source.
7 Select to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.

Item Description
Select the state that the instruction goes to on power-up or on controller PROG -> RUN
1 transition:
• De-energized - Set all outputs off (de-energized);
• Outputs for State 0 - Drive outputs to State 0 (as if a State 0 command had been
issued);
1 • Outputs for State 1 - Drive outputs to State 1
• Outputs for State 2 - Drive outputs to State 2
• Outputs for State 3 - Drive outputs to State 3
• Outputs for feedback state - Align the instruction state with the device feedbacks
(as if the block were in Hand on first scan).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 127

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Item Description
1 Select to shed if a Device Fault is detected.
2 Select to shed if an I/O Fault is detected.
1 3 Select to shed if target state is not reached.
2 The device always sheds on Interlock not OK. This item cannot be unchecked. It is
4
3
displayed as a reminder that Interlock not OK always triggers a shed.
5 Select to determine whether you hold position or go to state 0 upon a shed condition.
4

Item Description
1 Select to sound an audible on a commanded stage from State 0.
2 Select to sound an audible on a commanded stage from any State.
1 Enter the time (in seconds) that the audible sounds when there is a commanded State
3
2 change.
Enter a value (seconds) to indicate the delay to echo back reaching the state when in
4
3 virtual
5 Select yes to enable virtual
4

128 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter text to describe the state.
Check if the corresponding State object is used with this device. This check changes
the Permissive Indicator to a button that accesses the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissives object in the controller must be the name of
2
the object with the suffix ‘_Perm#’, where ‘#’ is the permissive number (0…3) For
example, if your PD4SD object has the name ’D4SD123’, then its Permissives object
must be named ‘D4SD123_Perm0’.

Item Description
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_Intlk. This check changes the interlock
indicator on the Operator tab to a button that opens the interlocks faceplate.
1 1 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your PD4SD object has the name’D4SD123’,
then its Interlock object must be named ‘D4SD123_Intlk’.
2
2 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
3 3 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
4 4 any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to
true.)
5 You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended tag
property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing tag>.@Library and
<backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 129

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 125 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

130 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 125 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1
1 Device state indicator
2 Move to state command buttons
2

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 131

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to energize
1 outputs to the device to be sure that they are latched in. (0 = output held
continuously)
1
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to allow the
2 device to reach the commanded state before issuing a fault.
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) that the
3 audible sounds when there is a commanded State change.
Enter a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to indicate the
4 delay to echo back reaching the state when in virtual.

Advanced Engineering Tab - State Configuration

Item Description
1 Select the number of states.
Left to Right:
1 • Set output parameters for a state (Cfg_bSt[x]OutWrite, and
Cfg_bSt[x]OutState). They determine how outputs are written to command
2 to the state.
2 • Set feedback parameters for a state (Cfg_bSt[x]FdbkCheck, and
Cfg_bSt[x]FcbkState). They determine how the state is interpreted from the
input values.

132 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior

Item Description
1 Select to reset a fault upon a new operator command.
2 Select to reset a fault upon a new external command.
Select (= 1) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0) available in any command
1 3 source. Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0)
available only in Operator or Maintenance command source.
2
Select (= 1) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available in any command
3 4 source. Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available
4 only in External command source.
5 Select to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.
5
Select the state that the instruction goes to on power-up or on controller PROG
-> RUN transition:
6 • De-energized - Set all outputs off (de-energized);
• Outputs for State 0 - Drive outputs to State 0 (as if a State 0 command had
been issued);
6 • Outputs for State 1 - Drive outputs to State 1
• Outputs for State 2 - Drive outputs to State 2
• Outputs for State 3 - Drive outputs to State 3
• Outputs for feedback state - Align the instruction state with the device
feedbacks (as if the block were in Hand on first scan).
7 Select to sound an audible on a commanded stage from State 0.
7 8 Select to sound an audible on a commanded stage from any State.
8 9 Select yes to enable virtual.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Shed Behavior

Item Description
1 Select to shed if a Device Fault is detected.
2 Select to shed if an I/O Fault is detected.
3 Select to shed if target state is not reached.
The device always sheds on Interlock not OK. This item cannot be unchecked. It
4 is displayed as a reminder that Interlock not OK always triggers a shed.
1 Select to determine whether you hold position or go to state 0 upon a shed
5 condition.
2
3
4
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 133

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Display the text to describe the state.
Check if the corresponding State object is used with this device. This check
changes the Permissive Indicator to a button that accesses the Permissive
faceplate. IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissives object in the controller must
2 be the name of the object with the suffix '_Perm#', where '#' is the permissive
number (0…3) For example, if your PD4SD object has the name 'D4SD123', then its
Permissives object must be named 'D4SD123_Perm0'.
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_Intlk. This check changes the
1 interlock indicator on the Operator tab to a button that opens the interlocks
3 faceplate. IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be
the name of the object with the suffix '_Intlk'. For example, if your PD4SD object
has the name'D4SD123', then its Interlock object must be named 'D4SD123_Intlk'.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj
is set to true.) You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate
4 to in the extended tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the
2
.@Library and .@Instruction extended tag properties to display the objects
faceplate.

3
4

134 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 135

Chapter 12 Discrete 2, 3, 4-state Device (PD4SD)

136 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 13

Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PDBC PDBC_GS GS_PDBC
Standard deadband controller graphic symbol.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
6 7 8

1
9
10

11
2
3 12
4
13
5

14 15 16 17

Item Description
1 PV EU maximum
2 Drive PV Lower Value
3 Current PV Value
4 Drive PV Higher Value
5 PV EU minimum
6 Drive PV Lower Limit
7 High Rate of Change Decreasing Limit
8 High Rate of Change Increasing Limit
9 Rate of Change Indicator
10 Current Rate of Change
11 Controlled Variable Indicator

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 137

Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Item Description
12 Auto/Manual Mode Indicator
13 Drive PV buttons. From left to right: drive PV lower, don’t drive PV, drive PV higher
14 Current PV Value
15 Drive PV Higher Limit
16 Auto Mode Command Button
17 Manual Mode Command Button

138 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns off and PV starts to
1 decrease.
1 7 Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns on and PV starts to
2
8 increase.
2
9
Enter the number that is used to establish the high deviation limit. When the
3 PV reaches this limit, a High Deviation alarm is generated.
10 3 EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Lower setpoint is 67 and the PV Hi Dev Status
4 is 5. We add 67 and 5 to get the high deviation limit of 72.
Enter the number that is used to establish the low deviation limit. When the
PV reaches this limit, a Low Deviation alarm is generated.
11 4
5 EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Raise setpoint is 30 and the PV Lo Dev Status
6
12 is -5. We add 30 and -5 to get the low deviation limit of 25.
Enter the number to set the high Rate of Change (decrease) limit (83 in the
5 example). When the Rate of Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Decrease
alarm is generated.
Enter the number to set the high Rate of Change (increase) limit (17 in the
6 example). When the Rate of Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Increase
alarm is generated.
Enter a number that is the size of the deadband for the Lower output (below
7 Lower limit)
Enter a number that is the size of the deadband for the Raise output (above
8 Raise limit)
Enter the number that PV must decrease to reset a High Deviation alarm.
EXAMPLE: The high deviation limit is 72 and the deadband is 1. The PV must
decrease 1 unit to 71 to reset the High Deviation alarm.
9 IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must decrease below
the Lower setpoint before the High Deviation alarm is reset. For example, the
deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must decrease to 62 to reset the
alarm.
Enter the number that PV must increase to reset a Low Deviation alarm.
EXAMPLE: The low deviation limit is 30 and the deadband is 1. The PV must
increase 1 unit to 26 to reset the Low Deviation alarm.
10 IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must increase above
the Raise setpoint before the Low Deviation alarm is reset. For example, the
deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must decrease to 35 to reset the
alarm.
Enter the number that the Rate of Change must decrease to reset a Hi Rate
11 of Decrease alarm.
Enter the number that the Rate of Change must increase to reset a Hi Rate of
12 Increase alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 139

Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the Process Variable high deviation gate delay (seconds).
2 Enter the Process Variable low deviation gate delay (seconds).
1 3 Enter the Process Variable high rate of change increase gate delays (seconds).
2 4 Enter the Process Variable high rate of change decrease gate delays (seconds).

Engineering Tab

Item Description
Select, the operator settings track the program settings when mode is Program, and
program settings track the operator settings when the mode is Operator. Transition
1
between modes is bumpless.
1
2 Clear the checkbox, this instruction does not modify the operator settings and program
settings. The operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of
3 mode. When the mode is changed, the value of a limit can change, such as from the
4 Program-set value to the Operator-set value.
2 Enter the lower limit for the Loop PV Higher point.
3 Enter the upper limit for the loop PV Lower point.
Minimum and maximum values for PV input.
5 4 These values are reflected on the PV bar graph on the Operator tab and the graph on
the Trends tab.
5 Select the PV rate of change time base used.
Enter the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of seconds
6 selected for the PV rate of change time base.
6

140 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the text of the engineering units for the PV.
2 Enter the number of decimal places that are used for the PV.
3 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
4 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1
2

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
1
1 any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
2 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 141

Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to the PV object.
2 Select to enable navigation to the output object.
1

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 137 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

142 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 137 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab
6 7 8

1
9
10
2
11
3
12
4
13
5

14 15 16 17

Item Description
1 PV EU maximum
2 Drive PV Lower Value
3 Current PV Value
4 Drive PV Higher Value
5 PV EU minimum
6 Drive PV Lower Limit
7 High Rate of Change Decreasing Limit
8 High Rate of Change Increasing Limit
9 Rate of Change Indicator
10 Current Rate of Change
11 Controlled Variable Indicator
12 Auto/Manual Mode Indicator
13 Drive PV buttons. From left to right: drive PV lower, don’t drive PV, drive PV higher
14 Current PV Value
15 Drive PV Higher Limit
16 Auto Mode Command Button
17 Manual Mode Command Button

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 143

Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Maintenance Tab - PV Limits

Item Description
Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns off and PV starts to
1 decrease.
Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns on and PV starts to
2 increase.
Enter the number that is used to establish the high deviation limit.
When the PV reaches this limit, a High Deviation alarm is generated.
3 EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Lower setpoint is 67 and the PV Hi Dev
1 5 Status is 5. We add 67 and 5 to get the high deviation limit of 72.
Enter the number that is used to establish the low deviation limit. When
2 6 the PV reaches this limit, a Low Deviation alarm is generated.
4 EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Raise setpoint is 30 and the PV Lo Dev
3 7 Status is - 5. We add 30 and -5 to get the low deviation limit of 25.
Enter a number that is the size of the deadband for the Lower output
4 8 5 (below Lower limit).
Enter a number that is the size of the deadband for the Raise output
6 (above Raise limit).
Enter the number that PV must decrease to reset a High Deviation
alarm.
EXAMPLE: The high deviation limit is 72 and the deadband is 1. The PV
must decrease 1 unit to 71 to reset the High Deviation alarm.
7 IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must decrease
below the Lower setpoint before the High Deviation alarm is reset. For
example, the deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must decrease to
62 to reset the alarm.
Enter the number that PV must increase to reset a Low Deviation alarm.
EXAMPLE: The low deviation limit is 30 and the deadband is 1. The PV
must increase 1 unit to 26 to reset the Low Deviation alarm.
8 IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must increase
above the Raise setpoint before the Low Deviation alarm is reset. For
example, the deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must decrease to
35 to reset the alarm.

Maintenance Tab - RoC Limits

Item Description
Enter the number to set the high Rate of Change (increase) limit.
1 When the Rate of Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Increase
alarm is generated.
Enter the number to set the high Rate of Change (decrease) limit.
2 When the Rate of Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Decrease
alarm is generated.
Enter the number that the Rate of Change must increase to reset a Hi
3
3 Rate of Increase alarm.
1
Enter the number that the Rate of Change must decrease to reset a Hi
4 4 Rate of Decrease alarm.
2

144 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the Process Variable high deviation gate delay (seconds).
1 2 Enter the Process Variable low deviation gate delay (seconds).
3 Enter the Process Variable high rate of change increase gate delays (seconds).
2
4 Enter the Process Variable high rate of change decrease gate delays (seconds).
3

Advanced Engineering Tab

Item Description
Select, the operator settings track the program settings when mode is Program,
and program settings track the operator settings when the mode is Operator.
Transition between modes is bumpless.
1 1 Clear the checkbox, this instruction does not modify the operator settings and
program settings. The operator settings and program settings retain their
2 values regardless of mode. When the mode is changed, the value of a limit can
change, such as from the Program-set value to the Operator-set value.
2 Select the PV rate of change time base used.
Enter the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of seconds
3 selected for the PV rate of change time base.
3 4 Enter the upper setpoint clamp limit.
5 Enter the lower setpoint clamp limit.
Minimum and maximum values for PV input.
6 These values are reflected on the PV bar graph on the Operator tab and the
4 graph on the Trends tab.
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 145

Chapter 13 Process Deadband Controller (PDBC)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Display the text of the engineering units for the PV.
2 Enter the number of decimal places that are used for the PV.
3 Select to enable navigation to the PV object.
1 4 Select to enable navigation to the output object.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj
2 is set to true.)
5 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that
has Instruction and Library defined.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 14

Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PDI PDI_GS GS_PDI
Global object with label.

In FactoryTalk Optix, this graphics symbol can

be configured to show or hide the label.

GO_PDI1 GS_PDI1

— Global object without label.

GO_PDI_Circle GS_PDI_Circle

— Global object with only indicator.

GO_PDI_CircleWLabel PDI_GS_CircleWLbl GS_PDI_CircleWLabel Global object with indicator and label.

In FactoryTalk Optix, this graphics symbol can

be configured to show or hide the label.

GO_PDI_L1_

— — Displays object status with label.

GO_PDI1_L1_

— — Displays object status without label.

GO_PDI_L1_Circle

— — Displays object indicator.

GO_PDI_L1_CircleWLabel

— — Displays object indicator with label.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 147

Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable
1 2 Target Process Variable

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select to enable the use of the Substitute Process Variable.
2 Select to choose Process Variable to be used.

1 2

148 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Minimum time the Process Variable must maintain the state, in seconds.

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select to enable the substitute Process Variable feature.
1 2 Select yes to enable Virtual.
2

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 149

Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter text to display in PV 0 State.
2 Enter text to display in PV 1 State.
3 Select to display state text in normal state
4 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
5 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.
1
2

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
1
1 after any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
set
2 to true.)
This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 147 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 151

Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 147 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Current Process Variable
2 Target Process Variable
2

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select to enable the use of the Substitute Process Variable.
2 Select to choose Process Variable to be used.
1
2

152 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - SAMA Diagram

Item Description
1 Minimum time the Process Variable must maintain the state, in seconds.

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Target Disagree Status Delay Timers

Item Description
1 Enter a value of the target disagree gate delay time.
2 Enter the value of the target disagree off delay time.
3 Enter the value of the target disagree on delay time.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 153

Chapter 14 Process Discrete Input (PDI)

Advanced Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select to enable the substitute Process Variable feature.
Select to allow the substitute PV to track the input target value, rather
1 2 than using the maintenance substitute PV value.
3 Select yes to enable Virtual.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Name for Text to display in PV 0 State.
2 Name for Text to display in PV 1 State.
3 Select to display state text in normal state
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
(Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.) This can be configured to navigate to
4 an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has Instruction and Library
defined.

1
2
3

154 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 15

Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PDO PDO_GS GS_PDO
Digital (2-state) device Graphic Symbol for use on overview
and detail displays.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Feedback indicator
1 2 Discrete output indicator
2 3 Continuous Pulse Button
4 Single Pulse 'Off' Button
5 Output 'Off' Button
6 Output 'On' Button
7 Single Pulse 'On' Button

3 4 5 6 7

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 155

Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed.

Advanced Maintenance

Item Description
Enter the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for the Off setting
1 before setting a fault.
2 Enter the amount of time before the output deactivates.
4
1 3 Enter the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device deactivates.
5 Enter the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for the On setting
4
2 before setting a fault.
6 5 Enter the amount of time before the output activates.
3
6 Enter the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device deactivates.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select to configure the instruction to use Off feedback signals from the device.
1 2 Select to configure the instruction to use On feedback signals from the device.
2 3 Select to Enable fault when both feedback inputs are either ON or OFF.
Select to reset a fault upon an operator command.
3 4 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset code.
Select to reset a fault upon an external command.
5 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset code.
4
6 Select to enable the pulsing functions.
5 Select if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed in override command
7 source.
6
Select to make the Operator Off command available in any command source. Clear
7
8 this checkbox to make the Operator Off command available only in Operator or
Maintenance command source.
8 Select to make the External Off command available in any command source. Clear
9 this checkbox to make the External Off command available only in Operator or
9 Maintenance command source.

Item Description
1 Select to finish pulse when commanded ON or OFF.
1 Select to de-energize the output to the device and return the device to its fail position,
when an I/O Fault condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the device in its current stat on an I/O Fault
2 condition.
2 IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on a fault,
a reset is required to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the device to a state
3 other than Off.
4 Select to de-energize the output to the device, return it to its fail position, when a
Position Fail condition occurs.
5 Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the device in its current state (keep trying)
3 on a Position Fail condition.
IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on a fault,
a reset is required to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the device to a state
other than Off.
6 The device outputs are always de-energized on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be
4 unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder that the Interlock Trip function always de-
energizes the device.
5 Select the setting for when the audible output of the object is on.
6 Enter the amount of time the audible output will be held on when enabled.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 157

Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Item Description
Sets the time delay (in seconds) for the On or Off status to be echoed back when
1 Virtual is enabled or when On and Off feedback is not used.
1
2 Select yes to enable Virtual.
2

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter text to display when device is in Off (0) state.
2 Enter text to display when device is in On (1) state.
3 Enter text to display for the off command.
4 Enter text to display for the on command.
1
5 Enter text to display for the pulse off command.
2 6 Enter text to display for the pulse on command.
3 7 Select to enable navigation to the permissive object
4 8 Select to enable navigation to the interlock object
5
6

158 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.
1 Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
3 any operator command.
2
Select whether there is navigation to an additional object or not. If selected, enter the
4
3 object name in the value.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 155 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 159

Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 155 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1
1 Device state indicator
2
2 Feedback indicator
3 3 Discrete output indicator
4 Continuous Pulse Button
5 Single Pulse 'Off' Button
6 Single Pulse 'On' Button
7 Output 'Off' Button
8 Output 'On' Button

4 5 6 7 8

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to inform the instruction that the Off feedback from the device
should be used to verify that the device reached its target state when
1 1 the output is off. If the command source is Hand and the instruction
2
is in Physical, the Off feedback is tracked for bumpless transfer from
Hand to another command source.
Select to inform the instruction that the On feedback from the device
3 should be used to verify that the device reached its target state when
2 the output is on. If the command source is Hand and the instruction is
in Physical, the On feedback is tracked for bumpless transfer from
Hand to another command source.
3 Select if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Left to Right:
• Enter the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for
1 the Off setting before setting a fault.
• Enter the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for
the On setting before setting a fault.
1 Left to Right:
2 • Enter the amount of time before the output deactivates.
2 • Enter the amount of time before the output activates.
Left to Right:
3 • Enter the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device
3 deactivates.
4 • Enter the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device
activates.
5 Sets the time delay (in seconds) for the On or Off status to be echoed
4 back when Virtual is enabled or when On and Off feedback is not
used.
Enter the amount of time the audible output will be held on when
5 enabled.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features

Item Description
Select to configure the instruction to use Off feedback signals from the
1 device.
1 Select to configure the instruction to use On feedback signals from the
2
2 device.
3 Select to enable the pulsing functions.
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 161

Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior

Item Description
Select to reset a fault upon an operator command. Clear this checkbox to reset
1 faults by using only the reset code.
1 Select to reset a fault upon an external command. Clear this checkbox to reset
2
2
faults by using only the reset code.
Select if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed in override
3 3 command source.
4 Select to make the Operator Off command available in any command source.
5 4 Clear this checkbox to make the Operator Off command available only in
6 Operator or Maintenance command source.
Select to make the External Off command available in any command source.
5 Clear this checkbox to make the External Off command available only in
7 Operator or Maintenance command source.
8
6 Select to finish pulse when commanded ON or OFF
9
Select to de-energize the output to the device and return the device to its fail
10 position, when an I/O Fault condition occurs. Clear this checkbox to keep the
output to the device in its current stat on an I/O Fault condition.
7 IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on
a fault, a reset is required to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the
11 device to a state other than Off.
Select to de-energize the output to the device, return it to its fail position,
when a Position Fail condition occurs. Clear this checkbox to keep the output
to the device in its current state (keep trying) on a Position Fail condition.
12 8 IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on
a fault, a reset is required to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the
device to a state other than Off.
The device outputs are always de-energized on an Interlock Trip. This item
9 cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder that the Interlock Trip
function always de-energizes the device.
10 Select the setting for when the audible output of the object is on.
11 Select to Enable fault when both feedback inputs are either ON or OFF
12 Select yes to enable Virtual.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Status Text

Item Description
1 Display the text for Off (0) state.
2 Displays the text for On (1) state.

1
2

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Command Text

Item Description
1 Name for text to display for the off command.
2 Name for text to display for the on command.
3 Name for text to display for the pulse off command.
4 Name for text to display for the pulse on command.

1
2
3
4

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 163

Chapter 15 Process Discrete Output (PDO)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to the permissive object.
2 Select to enable navigation to the interlock object.
Select whether there is navigation to an additional object or not. If selected,
enter the object name in the value. Navigation to an object with more
3 information is enabled if Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true. You configure the tag
name of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended tag property
"Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation".

1
2
3

164 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16

Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
PDOSE_GS_FlowMeter_T
GO_PDOSE_FM GS_PDOSE_FM

Vertical Orientation Top

PDOSE_GS_FlowMeter_B
GO_PDOSE_FM1 GS_PDOSE_FM1

Vertical Orientation Bottom

PDOSE_GS_FlowMeter_R
GO_PDOSE_FM2 GS_PDOSE_FM2

Horizontal Orientation Right

PDOSE_GS_FlowMeter_L
GO_PDOSE_FM3 GS_PDOSE_FM3

Horizontal Orientation Left

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 165

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
PDOSE_GS_Weigh_Scale_T
GO_PDOSE_WS GS_PDOSE_WS

Vertical orientation up.

PDOSE_GS_Weigh_R
GO_PDOSE_WS1 GS_PDOSE_WS2

Horizontal orientation right.

PDOSE_GS_Weigh_L
GO_PDOSE_WS2 GS_PDOSE_WS3

Horizontal orientation left.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Dosing Equipment Commanded State.
2 2 Delivery Progress Bar.
3 Configure the quantity to deliver.
4
4 Delivery progress.
3
Totalizer Control (from left to right)
• Select to clear the totalized quantity.
5 5 • Select to stop the Totalizer.
• Select to start the Totalizer.
• Select to check tolerances.
6 Select to stop the Totalizer flow.
7 Select to start the Totalizer flow.
8 Select to bump the Totalizer flow.
6 7 8

166 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Configure the quantity before the end of delivery, when a switch to a reduced
1 flow rate (dribble) for finer control of the final quantity is made.
1
Configure the quantity before reaching the Setpoint Quantity when a command
2 2 the delivery equipment to stop to allow equipment to react. The preact
quantity helps prevent overshooting the delivery Setpoint.
Enter the quantity by which delivery can exceed the setpoint. If the delivered
3 3 quantity is more than the setpoint plus this value, a tolerance check shows
over tolerance.
4
Enter the quantity by which delivery can fall short of the setpoint. If the
4 delivered quantity is less than the setpoint minus this value, a tolerance check
shows under tolerance.
Select whether there is equipment feedback or not. The equipment provides
5 run (dribble if used) and stop feedback.

Advanced Maintenance

Item Description
Enter a value so that when the flow rate is less than this value, it is treated as zero. This
1 1 value helps prevent totalizing the transmitter error when flow is stopped.
2 Enter the percentage of delivery error.
When the delivery tolerance is checked, if no bump has occurred and if the delivery is in
3 2 tolerance, the error (difference between delivery setpoint and actual delivery) is
multiplied by this percentage and applied to the preact. The preact self-tunes and learns
4 the correct value of the preact over time.
Configure the Time (in seconds) to Pulse the Clear Output to clear an external totalizer,
5 3 such as one in an intelligent flowmeter.
6 Enter the amount of time to command the controlled equipment to run flow when the
bump command button is pressed. If this value is set to zero, Bump is treated like a Jog:
4 flow starts when the button is pressed and stops when the button is released. If this value
7 is greater than zero, flow is bumped for the configured time.
8 Enter the amount of time in seconds after flow is stopped for the scale reading to settle
5 before a tolerance check can be commanded.
Enter the maximum allowed feedback time.
If equipment feedback is being used, the instruction allows this much time after
6 commanding the equipment for feedback to show the equipment in the commanded state
before raising a fault status.
7 Enter the flow high threshold. This is the limit for flow alarming.
8 Enter the flow low threshold. This is the limit for flow alarming.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 167

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
Select to adjust the Preact automatically based on the actual versus setpoint Quantity
1 1 after each successful delivery.
Clear this checkbox to leave the Preact as entered.
2 Select to command the equipment to a slower Dribble rate as delivery nears completion
2 to improve the accuracy of Quantity delivered.
3
Select if the controlled equipment provides feedback of its running, dribbling, and
4 stopped status to this instruction. This instruction checks that the equipment is
performing the commanded function and provides a status (and optional alarm) if the
5 equipment fails to respond as commanded within a configurable time.
3 IMPORTANT: The feedback fault time is configured on the Advanced Maintenance tab.
Clear this checkbox if the controlled equipment does not provide feedback of its status.
6 The instruction assumes that the equipment is performing the commanded function and
no equipment failure-to-respond checks occur.
7
Select if you want the dosing instruction to attempt to stop the controlled equipment if
an equipment fault is reported (Inp_CtrldEqupFault) or detected (via feedbacks).
4 Clear this checkbox if you want the dosing instruction to keep performing its current
function, even if an equipment fault occurs.
5 Select to allow continuous rate monitoring.
6 Select to designate as a Transfer In instance.
7 Select to designate as a Transfer Out instance.

Item Description
Enter the maximum allowed quantity to deliver. The quantity setpoint is clamped not to
1
1
exceed this value.
Enter the number of counts in Inp_QtyPV that equal one engineering unit of quantity
2
2 delivered. This value is used with pulse output flowmeters and a pulse input I/O card.
3 Enter the rate to quantity engineering units multiplier. This value is used if the input is
3 in one unit of measure, such as gallons per minute, and the total is in another that
requires conversion above and beyond time units, such as barrels.
4 Enter the quantity rollover. This value is used when a quantity or pulse count input rolls
4 over to zero at some value, such as 999,999 counts.
5
5 Enter the filter time constant for calculated rate.
6
6 Select the time base for rate.
Enter the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of seconds
7 selected for the time base for rate.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Item Description
Select to keep control of dosing Start and Stop commands with the Operator, Program,
1
External, or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
Select to keep control of the Setpoint quantity setting with the Operator, Program,
2 External, or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
Select to keep control of the Dribble and Preact quantity settings with the Operator,
3 Program, External, or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command
1 source.
2 Select to keep control of the high and low Tolerance settings with the Operator,
4 Program, External, or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command
3 source.

Item Description
Enter the normal running delivery rate that is used when the P_Dose instruction is in
1
1
virtual (Inp_Sim = 1).
Enter the dribble (slow) delivery rate that is used when the P_Dose instruction is in
2 2 virtual (Inp_Sim = 1).
3 Select yes to enable virtual.
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 169

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the units of measure descriptor for the Quantity delivered.
2 Enter the units of measure descriptor for the Rate of delivery.
Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Quantity Process
3 Variable
4 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Rate Process Variable
1
5 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
2
6 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.
3

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
1
1 any operator command.
2 Select to configure if a Historical data source will be used or not.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
3 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to a Quantity PV object
2 Select to enable navigation to a Rate PV object
1

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 166 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 171

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 166 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Dosing Equipment Commanded State.
2 2 Delivery Progress Bar.
3 Configure the quantity to deliver.
4
4 Delivery progress.
3
Totalizer Control (from left to right)
• Select to clear the totalized quantity.
5 • Select to stop the Totalizer.
• Select to start the Totalizer.
5
• Select to check tolerances.
6 Select to stop the Totalizer flow.
7 Select to start the Totalizer flow.
8 Select to bump the Totalizer flow.

6 7 8

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Configure the quantity before the end of delivery, when a switch to a
1 reduced flow rate (dribble) for finer control of the final quantity is made.
Configure the quantity before reaching the Setpoint Quantity when a
2 command the delivery equipment to stop to allow equipment to react. The
1
preact quantity helps prevent overshooting the delivery Setpoint.
12
Enter the quantity by which delivery can exceed the setpoint. If the
3 delivered quantity is more than the setpoint plus this value, a tolerance
check shows over tolerance.
Enter the quantity by which delivery can fall short of the setpoint. If the
3 4 delivered quantity is less than the setpoint minus this value, a tolerance
check shows under tolerance.
4
Select whether there is equipment feedback or not. The equipment
5
5 provides run (dribble if used) and stop feedback.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter a value so that when the flow rate is less than this value, it is treated as
1 zero. This value helps prevent totalizing the transmitter error when flow is
stopped.
1
Enter the percentage of delivery error.
2
When the delivery tolerance is checked, if no bump has occurred and if the
2 delivery is in tolerance, the error (difference between delivery setpoint and
actual delivery) is multiplied by this percentage and applied to the preact. The
preact self-tunes and learns the correct value of the preact over time.
Configure the Time (in seconds) to Pulse the Clear Output to clear an external
3 3 totalizer, such as one in an intelligent flowmeter.
4 Enter the amount of time to command the controlled equipment to run flow
when the bump command button is pressed. If this value is set to zero, Bump
4 is treated like a Jog: flow starts when the button is pressed and stops when
5 the button is released. If this value is greater than zero, flow is bumped for
the configured time.
6 Enter the amount of time in seconds after flow is stopped for the scale
5 reading to settle before a tolerance check can be commanded.
Enter the maximum allowed feedback time. If equipment feedback is being
used, the instruction allows this much time after commanding the equipment
7 6 for feedback to show the equipment in the commanded state before raising a
fault status.
8
7 Enter the flow high threshold. This is the limit for flow alarming.
8 Enter the flow low threshold. This is the limit for flow alarming.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features

Item Description
Select if the controlled equipment provides feedback of its running, dribbling,
and stopped status to this instruction. This instruction checks that the
1 equipment is performing the commanded function and provides a status (and
optional alarm) if the equipment fails to respond as commanded within a
configurable time.
2 1 IMPORTANT: The feedback fault time is configured on the Advanced
Maintenance tab. Clear this checkbox if the controlled equipment does not
3 provide feedback of its status. The instruction assumes that the equipment is
performing the commanded function and no equipment failure-to-respond
4 checks occur.
Enter the maximum allowed quantity to deliver. The quantity setpoint is
2
5 clamped not to exceed this value.
Enter the number of counts in Inp_QtyPV that equal one engineering unit of
6 3 quantity delivered. This value is used with pulse output flowmeters and a
pulse input I/O card.
7
Enter the rate to quantity engineering units multiplier. This value is used if
the input is in one unit of measure, such as gallons per minute, and the total
4 is in another that requires conversion above and beyond time units, such as
barrels.
Enter the quantity rollover. This value is used when a quantity or pulse count
5
8
input rolls over to zero at some value, such as 999,999 counts.
6 Enter the filter time constant for calculated rate.
7 Select the time base for rate.
Enter the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of
8 seconds selected for the time base for rate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 173

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Behavior

Item Description
Select to adjust the Preact automatically based on the actual versus setpoint Quantity
1 after each successful delivery.
Clear this checkbox to leave the Preact as entered.
1 Select to command the equipment to a slower Dribble rate as delivery nears completion
2
2 to improve the accuracy of Quantity delivered.
3 Select if you want the dosing instruction to attempt to stop the controlled equipment if
an equipment fault is reported (Inp_CtrldEqupFault) or detected (via feedbacks). Clear
4 3 this checkbox if you want the dosing instruction to keep performing its current
function, even if an equipment fault occurs.
5
4 Select to allow continuous rate monitoring.
6
5 Select to designate as a Transfer In instance.
7 6 Select to designate as a Transfer Out instance.
7 Select yes to enable virtual.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Rate in Loopback Test

Item Description
1 Enter the normal running delivery rate that is used when the instruction is in virtual.
2 Enter the dribble (slow) delivery rate that is used when the instruction is in virtual.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions

Item Description
Select to keep control of dosing Start and Stop commands with the Operator, Program,
1 External, or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the Setpoint quantity setting with the Operator, Program,
2 External, or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the Dribble and Preact quantity settings with the Operator,
3 Program, External, or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the high and low Tolerance settings with the Operator,
4 Program, External, or Follow the Source.

1
2
3
4

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision

Item Description
1 Display unit for Quantity delivered.
2 Display unit for Rate of delivery.
1 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Quantity Process
3
2 Variable.
4 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Rate Process Variable.
3
4

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 175

Chapter 16 Process Dosing (PDOSE)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to a Quantity PV object.
2 Select to enable navigation to a Rate PV object.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
3 to true.) This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that
has Instruction and Library defined.
1

176 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 17

Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic
Graphic Symbol Name Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol

GO_PFO P_Fanout graphic symbol (horizontal layout).

GO_PFO1 P_Fanout graphic symbol (vertical layout).

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode.

If outputs 6, 7, and 8 are used by the instruction (in other words, if Cfg_HasCV6… Cfg_HasCV8
are 1), the Home tab has a second page that displays the information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 177

Chapter 17 Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Maintenance Tab

1 2 3

Item Description
Enter a value that sets the ratio to calculate each individual output.
1 This value either sets the operator ratio (for example, OSet_CV1Ratio) or the
configuration ratio (for example, Cfg_CV1Ratio) depending on the ratio source selection.
Enter a value that sets the offset to calculate each individual output.
This value either sets the operator offset (for example, OSet_CV1Offset) or the
2 configuration offset (for example, Cfg_CV1Offset) depending on the ratio source
selection.
Operator setting for the Input CV rate of change limit (increasing or decreasing).
3 If Cfg_MaxCVRoC = 0.0, then this parameter can be set to zero, which means the rate of
change is not limited.

Engineering Tab

1 2 3 4

Item Description
1 Select to enable use of the corresponding output.
2 Enter a value for the minimum value to be used to clamp CV (in engineering units).
3 Enter a value for the maximum value to be used to clamp CV (in engineering units).
Enter a rate that the CV is to change to a calculated value after initialization to provide
4 bumpless transfer from initialization.

178 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 17 Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Item Description
1 Enter values to set the limits to use to clamp the CV.
2 Enter values to set the limits to display for the CV.
1 Select to use the CV1 initialization value (Inp_CV1InitVal) to set the initialization output
3 (Out_CV_InitVal) when initialization is requested.
Select to use a fixed value (Cfg_FixedInitVal) to set the initialization output
(Out_CV_InitVal) when initialization is requested.
2 4
Enter a value to set the initialization value (Out_CVInitVal) if initialization is requested
and a fixed value option is selected.
5 Select to pass through the bad value.
3 6 Select to hold last good value.
4

5
6

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the description of the output name.
2 Enter the units that are used with the CV.
3 Sets the CV engineering units to use for display.

2
1 3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 179

Chapter 17 Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Item Description
1 Enter the number of decimal places to be shown for CV.
1 Select to permit navigation to an input CV object faceplate for which you typed a tag
2 name.
Select to permit navigation to an output CV object faceplate for which you typed a tag
3 name.
2

180 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 17 Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 177 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab
If outputs 6, 7, and 8 are used by the instruction (in other words, if Cfg_HasCV6… Cfg_HasCV8
are 1), the Home tab has a second page that displays the information.

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 181

Chapter 17 Process Analog Fanout (PFO)

Notes:

182 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 18

Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PHLS PHLS_GS GS_PHLS

Standard High or Low Selector graphic symbol.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
The Operator tab shows the following information:
• Current operation (High or Low Select)
• Currently selected input (white highlight)
• Bar graph for clamp limits from minimum to maximum plus Output CV indicator
• Input CV values and Output CV value

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 183

Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to use a CV input.
1 1 Clear a checkbox not to use the input and put the instruction in Maintenance
Bypass.

Engineering Tab
4

Item Description
1 Select 'Has Input' (CV1…CV6) where an input is connected.
Enter in the minimum and maximum to set the range for the selected input CV.
2 If the selected input CV is below the minimum, it is clamped to the minimum value.
1 If the selected input CV is above the maximum, it is clamped to the maximum value.
Select High Select to select the highest input CV value to pass to the output.
3 Select Low Select to select the lowest input CV value to pass to the output.
4 Select a 'Use Offset' (CV1…CV6) to include the Kp*E offset in initialization calculation.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
2 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the CV.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
3 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
1 Instruction and Library defined.
4 Select to enable navigation to an output object.
2
31

Item Description
1 Select an input (CV1…CV6) or the Output CV to allow navigation to a specified object.
2 Enter the tag name for the corresponding input (CV1…CV6) or Output CV.
1
2

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 185

Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 183 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

186 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 183 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab
The Operator tab shows the following information:
• Current operation (High or Low Select)
• Currently selected input (white highlight)
• Bar graph for clamp limits from minimum to maximum plus Output CV indicator
• Input CV values and Output CV value

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to use a CV input. Clear a checkbox not to use the input and put
1 the instruction in Maintenance Bypass.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 187

Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Advanced Engineering Tab

Item Description
Left to Right:
1 1 • Select 'Has Input' (CV1…CV6) where an input is connected.
• Select a 'Use Offset' (CV1…CV6) to include the Kp*E offset in initialization calculation.
Select High Select to select the highest input CV value to pass to the output.
2 Select Low Select to select the lowest input CV value to pass to the output.
Enter in the minimum and maximum to set the range for the selected input CV.
3 If the selected input CV is below the minimum, it is clamped to the minimum value.
If the selected input CV is above the maximum, it is clamped to the maximum value.
2

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision

Item Description
1 The engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
2 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the CV.
1
2

188 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select an input (CV1…CV6) or the Output CV to allow navigation to a specified object.
2 Display the tag name for the corresponding input (CV1…CV6) or Output CV.
3 Select to enable navigation to an output object.
1 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
2 to true.)
4 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 189

Chapter 18 Process High or Low Selector (PHLS)

Notes:

190 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 19

Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol
GO_PINTLK raP_5_20_PINTLK_GS

Standard Interlock Graphic Symbol.

Interlock States
Item Description

Not ready to run or energize. One or more interlock conditions are not OK.

Ready to run or energize. One or more conditions that can be bypassed are not OK, but these
conditions are bypassed. All conditions that cannot be bypassed are OK.

Ready to run or energize. All interlock conditions are OK.

Ready to run or energize, and all interlock conditions are OK, conditions that can be bypassed
are being bypassed and the equipment is not shut down.

The overall graphic symbol includes a touch field that opens the faceplate. Hover the pointing
device over the graphic symbol to display a tooltip that describes the function of the symbol
(FatcoryTalk View SE).

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 191

Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) Tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Interlock bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured interlock along with the current state of the interlock

If navigation is enabled, Select a condition to open the faceplate of the object that is
associated with the condition.
The following figure shows the Operator tab in a non-bypassed condition with no faults.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select an interlock condition that can be bypassed, one that has a
1 white checkbox, to enable bypass of that individual interlock.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Engineering Tab

2 3 4 5 6
Item Description
Enter the text description of each interlock condition used. Only the
1 interlocks with text entered appear on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
2 Selects the state of the corresponding interlock that is the OK to Run state.
3 Select to indicate that the corresponding interlock can be bypassed.
Select to indicate that the corresponding interlock is latched and must be
4 reset.
Select to configure the interlock for stop only. The object (motor) the
5 interlock object is associated will trip when if this specific interlock is not
OK, but it will not alarm.
1
Select to define the interlock type. The display opens to select an available
interlock type that was defined in the HMI Configuration.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
Select to enable the interlock type that can be defined in the Engineering
1 tab. There are eight types that are configurable. The first three letters
define the short name type followed by ‘:’ and then the full type description.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 193

Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would
1
1 take place after any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
(Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.)
2 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag
that has Instruction and Library defined.
3 Select to allow navigation to interlock input objects.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 191 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

194 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 195

Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 191 for descriptions of the features.

If Interlock Banks are used, all interlock banks will be shown on a single faceplate.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) Tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Interlock bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured interlock along with the current state of the interlock

If navigation is enabled, Select a condition to open the faceplate of the object that is
associated with the condition.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select an interlock condition that can be bypassed, one that has a white
1 checkbox, to enable bypass of that individual interlock.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Advanced Engineering Tab

2 3 4 5 6
Item Description
The text description of each interlock condition used. Only the interlocks
1 with text entered appear on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
Selects the state of the corresponding interlock that is the OK to Run
2 state.
3 Select to indicate that the corresponding interlock can be bypassed.
Select to indicate that the corresponding interlock is latched and must
4 be reset.
1 Select to configure the interlock for stop only. The object (motor) the
5 interlock object is associated will trip when if this specific interlock is
not OK, but it will not alarm.
Select to define the interlock type. The display opens to select an
available interlock type that was defined in the HMI Configuration.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select to allow navigation to interlock input objects.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
2 (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.) This can be configured to navigate to an
object backing tag or a UDT tag that has Instruction and Library defined.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 197

Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Interlock Types

Item Description
Select to enable the interlock type that can be defined in the Engineering
1 tab. There are eight types that are configurable. The first three letters
define the short name type followed by ':' and then the full type description.
1

198 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 199

Chapter 19 Process Interlock (PINTLK)

200 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 20

Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol

GO_PLLS_Motors A group of motors.

GO_PLLS_Blowers A group of blowers.

GO_PLLS_Pumps A group of pumps

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Motor state indicator.
2 Individual motor state indicators.
2 Enter a number between 0 and the maximum demand to indicate the number of
3 motors to run.
Select to rotate motor assignments. The lead motor is demoted to the end of the
4 list. Motors are started or stopped to satisfy Number of Motors to Run.
5 Select to start group.
Select to stop group.
3 6 IMPORTANT: Motors stop in reverse order of starting unless First Started is First
Stopped on the engineering tab is checked.

4 5 6

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 201

Chapter 20 Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Manual Mode Tab

1 2
Item Description
1 Displays the current preference for a motor.
Enter new preference value. The preference value determines the precedence
2 when starting motors.
3 Apply the values in the new column to the preference values.
4 Reset preferences to previous.

3 4

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to place a motor in service (not in maintenance bypass).
1
1 Clear the checkbox to place a motor out of service (maintenance bypass)
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Select No
2 to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 20 Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the number of seconds after a start or stop that the next start is allowed.
1 2 Enter the number of seconds after a start or stop that the next stop is allowed.

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the number of motors (2…30) in the group.
2 Enter the highest number of motors that can be running.
1 3 Enter the lowest number of motors that can be running.
2 4 Select to allow the Rotate command to rotate motor assignments.
3 5 Select to rotate the lead motor to the end of list upon stopping all motors.
6 Select so that the first motor that is started is the first motor that is stopped.
4 Select to allow the Operator Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults
7 (Interlock Trip), then start or stop the group.
5 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
6 Select to allow the External Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults
8 (Interlock Trip), then start or stop the group.
7 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
8 Select to bypass interlocks and permissives that are bypassable when in Override
9 command source.
9

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 203

Chapter 20 Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Item Description
Select (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
Command Source is not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
1 1 Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance
2 command source.
Select (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
3 Command Source is not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
2 Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source
4 is External.
5 Select to have Program settings (such as Speed Reference) track Operator settings in
3 Operator command source, and have Operator settings track Program settings in
Program command source.
Select to have Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed
4 Reference in Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.
Enter the start priority within the list of the motors selected.
5 Motors start in order of priority (0...31) and the higher numbers start first.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
Select if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the
Permissive indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
1 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_LLS object has the name
’LLS123’, then its Permissive object must be named ‘LLS123_Perm’.
Select if an Interlock object is used with this group. Checking this box changes the
1 Interlock indicator to a clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the object
2 name with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_LLS object has the name’LLS123’,
then its Interlock object must be named ‘LLS123_Intlk’.
3 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
3
4 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.
4

204 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 20 Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
1
1 any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
2 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

Item Description
Select to allow navigation to motor objects.
1
1 Additional pages are available if configured for more than 8 motors.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 205

Chapter 20 Process Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (PLLS)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 201 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Manual Mode

Maintenance Tab

206 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21

Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol
GO_PMTR_R GS_PMTR_R

GO_PMTR_U PMTR_GS_Motor_R GS_PMTR_U

Motors operate in different positions:

right, up, and down.

GO_PMTR_D GS_PMTR_D

GO_PMTR_Pump_R GS_PMTR_Pump_R

PMTR_GS_Pumps GS_PMTR_Pump_L
GO_PMTR_Pump_L

Pumps operate in several positions: right,

left, and up

GO_PMTR_Pump_U GS_PMTR_Pump_U

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 207

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol
GO_PMTR_Inline_U GS_PMTR_Inline_U

GO_PMTR_Inline_L GS_PMTR_Inline_L

PMTR_GS_Inline_Motor

Inline motors operate in several

GO_PMTR_Inline_D GS_PMTR_Inline_D positions: up, left, down, and right.

GO_PMTR_Inline_R GS_PMTR_Inline_R

GO_PMTR_Blower_R GS_PMTR_Blower_R

GO_PMTR_Blower_L GS_PMTR_Blower_L

PMTR_GS_Blowers

Blowers operate in different positions:

GO_PMTR_Blower_U GS_PMTR_Blower_U right, left, up, and down.

GO_PMTR_Blower_D GS_PMTR_Blower_D

GO_PMTR_Conveyor_R GS_PMTR_Conveyor_R
Conveyor that is shown as a Graphic
— Symbol.

GO_PMTR_Agitator_D PMTR_GS_Agitator GS_PMTR_Agitator_D

Agitator that is shown as a Graphic Symbol

208 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol
GO_PMTR_Mixer_U GS_PMTR_Mixer_U

— Mixer that is shown as a Graphic Symbol.

GO_PMTR_RPump_U GS_PMTR_RotaryPump_U

Rotary gear pump that is shown as a

— Graphic Symbol.

GO_PMTR_Fan_D GS_PMTR_Fan_D

— Fan that is shown as a Graphic Symbol.

GO_PMTR_L1_
— — Indicator with label.

GO_PMTR_L1_Motor
— — Motor indicator

GO_PMTR_L1_Pump
— — Pump indicator

GO_PMTR_L1_Blower
— — Blower indicator

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 209

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Motor state (stopping, stopped, starting, or running)
2 Current command source (Program, Operator, Override, Maintenance, or Hand)
Motor command buttons. The buttons change based on the motor configuration.

Start Forward Speed 1

Start Forward Speed 2

Jog Forward Speed 1

2 3
3 Jog Forward Speed 2

Stop

Start Reverse

Jog Reverse

Maintenance Tab

2 3 4

Item Description
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives.
1 Select No to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.
Select to open the runtime faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to run time object'
on the HMI Configuration tab is checked.
Select to open the Restart Inhibit faceplate.
3 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to restart inhibit
object' on the HMI Configuration tab is checked.
Select to open the device object faceplate.
4 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to device object' on
1 the HMI Configuration tab is checked.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the time for the reset output to be pulsed.
Enter the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has started before
1 2 raising a fail to start alarm.
2 Enter the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before
3 raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
3 Enter the maximum time to allow the motor to jog. Enter zero to allow unlimited jog
4 time.
4

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select the motor type.
1 Select if the motor provides run feedback to Inp_SlowRunFdbk and Inp_FastRunFdbk.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
2 IMPORTANT: This check places the device in Maintenance Bypass unless 'Use Run
Feedback' on the Maintenance tab is checked.
3 Select to allow the motor to start at speed 1.
4 Select to allow the motor to start at speed 2.
2
5 Select to allow the motor to be jogged.
3
6 Select to allow the motor to jog at speed 2.
4 7 Select to allow the motor to be stopped.
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 211

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Item Description
Select to allow the Operator commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop to reset any
1 previous faults (I/O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop
1
motor.
2 Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset commands.
Select to allow the External commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop to reset any
3 previous faults (I/O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop
2 motor.
4 Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset commands.
5 3 Select to bypass bypassable interlocks and permissives in Override command source.
Select to have the Operator Stop command available in any command source.
4 Clear this checkbox to have the Operator Stop command available only in the Operator
and Maintenance command sources.
Select to have the External Stop command available in any command source.
5 Clear this checkbox to have the External Stop command available only in the Operator
and Maintenance command sources.

Item Description
Select to stop the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
1 Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not stop the motor if an
1
I/O fault is detected.
Select to stop the motor if a fail to Start fault is detected.
2 2 Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status/alarm and not stop the motor if
3 a fail to Start fault is detected.
The motor always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed
3
4 as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the motor.
4 Enter the amount of time to sound the audible alarm when the motor starts.
5 Enter the time delay between when the run output has turned off for one speed and
5 when it is turned on for the other speed.
6
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the running or stopped status to be echoed back
6
7
when the virtual is enabled or when run feedback is not used.
7 Select yes to enable virtual.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Item Description
Select one of the four options to determine the source of each command (start and
1 jog). If any option but “Follow Source” is selected, then that source will be the only
source allowed for that command.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the text to display when the motor is running at speed 1.
2 Enter the text to display when the motor is running at speed 2.
3 Enter the text to display when the motor is starting at speed 1.
4 Enter the text to display when the motor is starting at speed 2.
5 Enter the text to display when the motor is jogging at speed 1.
1
6 Enter the text to display when the motor is jogging at speed 2.
2
3
4
5
6

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 213

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Item Description
Select if Start Speed 1 permissive object is used with this motor.
1 • For 2 Speed Motors, speed 1 is Slow and Speed 2 is Fast.
• For Reversing Motors, speed 1 is Forward and Speed 2 is Reverse.
2 1
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
3 the object with the suffix ‘_1Perm’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Start Speed 1 object must be named ‘Motor123_1Perm’.
4
Select if Start Speed 2 permissive object is used with this motor.
5 • For 2 Speed Motors, speed 1 is Slow and Speed 2 is Fast.
• For Reversing Motors, speed 1 is Forward and Speed 2 is Reverse.
6 2
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix ‘_2Perm’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Permissive object must be named ‘Motor123_2Perm’.
7
Select if an interlock object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
3 object with the suffix ‘_Intlk_0’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
8
’Motor123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk_0’.
Select if a restart inhibit object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name
4 of the object with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Restart Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
Select if a run time object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of
5 the object with the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
‘Motor123’, then its Run Time object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
6 Select to allow navigation to the device object.
7 Select to allow Operator to shelve the alarm.
8 Select to allow Maintenance to disable the alarm.

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place after
1
1 any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
2 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 209 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 215

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 209 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Motor state (stopping, stopped, starting, or running)
1
2 Current command source (Program, Operator, Override, Maintenance, or Hand)
Motor command buttons. The buttons and locations change based on the motor
configuration.

Start Forward Speed 1

Start Forward Speed 2

Jog Forward Speed 1

2 3

3 Jog Forward Speed 2

Stop

Start Reverse.

Jog Reverse.

216 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Maintenance Tab

1 2 3

Item Description
Select to open the runtime faceplate.
1 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to run time object'
on the HMI Configuration tab is checked.
Select to open the Restart Inhibit faceplate.
4 2 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to restart inhibit
object' on the HMI Configuration tab is checked.
Select to open the device object faceplate.
5 3 IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to device object' on
the HMI Configuration tab is checked.
4 Select to use Run Feedback.
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Select
5 No to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the time for the reset output to be pulsed.
1 Enter the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has started before
2 raising a fail to start alarm.
2 Enter the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before
3
3
raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
Enter the maximum time to allow the motor to jog. Enter zero to allow unlimited jog
4
4 time.
5 Enter the amount of time to sound the audible alarm when the motor starts.
5
Enter the time delay between when the run output has turned off for one speed and
6
6 when it is turned on for the other speed.
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the running or stopped status to be echoed back
7
7 when the virtual is enabled or when run feedback is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 217

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Motor Features

Item Description
1 Select the motor type.
1 Select if the motor provides run feedback to Inp_1RunFdbkData and Inp_2RunFdbkData.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
2 IMPORTANT: This check places the device in Maintenance Bypass unless 'Use Run
Feedback' on the Maintenance tab is checked.
3 Select to allow the motor to start at speed 1.
2 4 Select to allow the motor to start at speed 2.
3 5 Select to allow the motor to be jogged.
4 6 Select to allow the motor to jog at speed 2.
5
7 Select to allow the motor to be stopped.
6
7

Advanced Engineering Tab - Motor Behavior

Item Description
Select to allow the Operator commands for Start or Stop to reset any previous faults (I/
1 O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor. Clear this
checkbox to reset faults only using the reset commands.
1 Select to allow the External commands for Start or Stop to reset any previous faults (I/O
2 2 fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor. Clear this
checkbox to reset faults only using the reset commands.
3 3 Select to bypass bypassable interlocks and permissives in Override command source.
4 Select to have the Operator Stop command available in any command source. Clear this
5 4 checkbox to have the Operator Stop command available only in the Operator and
Maintenance command sources.
6
Select to have the External Stop command available in any command source. Clear this
5 checkbox to have the External Stop command available only in the Operator and
7 Maintenance command sources.
8 Select to allow the motor to be started or stopped locally without triggering a Fail to
9 start or Fail to stop when not executing a start or stop command.
6 Clear this checkbox to raise a Fail to start or Fail to stop status on an uncommanded
10 start or stop.
Select to stop the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not stop the motor if an
7 I/O fault is detected.

Select to stop the motor if a fail to Start fault is detected.

8 Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status/alarm and not stop the motor if
a fail to Start fault is detected.
The motor always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed
9 as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the motor.
10 Select 'Yes' to enable virtual.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions

Item Description
Select one of the four options to determine the source of each command (start and
1 jog). If any option but “Follow Source” is selected, then that source will be the only
source allowed for that command.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Status Text

Item Description
1 Display the text when the motor is running at speed 1.
2 Display the text when the motor is running at speed 2.
3 Display the text when the motor is starting at speed 1.
1
4 Display the text when the motor is starting at speed 2.
2
3 5 Display the text when the motor is stopped.
4 6 Display the text when the motor is stopping.
5 7 Display the text when the motor is jogging at speed 1.
6
8 Display the text when the motor is jogging at speed 2.
7
8

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 219

Chapter 21 Process Motor (Power Discrete) (PMTR)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Command Text

Item Description
1 Display the label for the command of starting at speed 1.
2 Display the label for the command of starting at speed 2.
3 Display the label for the command of stopping.
4 Display the label for the command of jogging at speed 1.
1
5 Display the label for the command of jogging at speed 2.
2
3
4
5

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
Select if Start Speed 1 permissive object is used with this motor.
For 2 Speed Motors, speed 1 is Slow and Speed 2 is Fast.
For Reversing Motors, speed 1 is Forward and Speed 2 is Reverse.
1 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix ‘_1Perm’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Start Speed 1 object must be named ‘Motor123_1Perm’.
Select if Start Speed 2 permissive object is used with this motor.
For 2 Speed Motors, speed 1 is Slow and Speed 2 is Fast.
For Reversing Motors, speed 1 is Forward and Speed 2 is Reverse.
1 2 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
2 the object with the suffix ‘_2Perm’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Permissive object must be named ‘Motor123_2Perm’.
3
Select if an interlock object is used with this motor.
4 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
3 object with the suffix ‘_Intlk_0’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
5
’Motor123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk_0’.
6 Select if a restart inhibit object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name
4
7 of the object with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
’Motor123’, then its Restart Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
Select if a run time object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of
5 the object with the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your PMTR object has the name
‘Motor123’, then its Run Time object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
6 Select to allow navigation to the device object.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
7 to true.) This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that
has Instruction and Library defined.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 22

n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Description
Symbol

GO_PnPos_8SelValve

GO_PnPos_8SelValve1

GO_PnPos_6SelValve

GO_PnPos_6SelValve1
These Graphic Symbols are used for routing one flow path to
many vertically. These elements show all 3, 4, 6, or 8 ports and
GO_PnPos_4SelValve unused ports are not hidden.

GO_PnPos_4SelValve1

GO_PnPos_3SelValve

GO_PnPos_3SelValve1

GO_PnPOS_8PosRotary

These Graphic Symbols are used for rotary selection from one
port to many ports. Only the ports that are enabled are
GO_PnPOS_6PosRotary displayed. For example, if you configure the PnPos instruction
with five positions, ports 6, 7, and 8 are not displayed.

GO_PnPOS_4PosRotary

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 221

Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Description
Symbol

GO_PnPOS_SlideGate

These Graphic Symbols show a linear multi-position device.

The symbol is animated to show the position that is based on
the number of positions configured.

GO_PnPOS_SlideGate1

GO_PnPos

These Graphic Symbols are similar to those elements shown

on the first page of this table, but ports that aren’t configured
are not displayed.

GO_PnPos1

GO_PnPos2

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator command source.

Item Description
1 Current device position

There is a larger faceplate available that supports 30 positions.

1

222 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Maintenance Tab
Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance tab to adjust
device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device problems, and disable the
device for routine maintenance.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings. The Advanced
Properties Display provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges, and
options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later
system changes.

Item Description
Enter a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the maximum time that is allowed for
1 lock feedback before a fault.
1
Enter a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the maximum time that is allowed for the
2 device to be in position before a fault.
2
Enter a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the time delay before engaging a cylinder
3 move.
3
Enter a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the delay time to verify that a device is in
4
4 a commanded position.
Enter a value (0…2,147,483) to indicate the number of retires for a device in Position
5
5 1 before a fault is set.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 223

Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Item Description
This state is highlighted whenever the device is in the position that it was last
1 commanded.
This state is highlighted if the device feedback fails to confirm that the device is
1 4 2 unlocked, moved to position, or locked as requested within the configured failure
times.
This state is displayed only if the device is configured with a lock or seal that must
be unlocked or unsealed to move. This state is highlighted when the device has
3 reached its commanded position and has been commanded to lock, but locked
2 feedback has not been received yet.
This state is displayed only if the device is configured with a lock or seal that must
4 be unlocked or unsealed to move. This state is highlighted when the device has
been commanded to unlock, but unlocked feedback has not been received yet.
5 This state is highlighted when the device is being moved to its commanded
3 5 position, but that position feedback has not been received yet.

Engineering Tabs

Item Description
1 Select circular or linear for the device type
For Circular, select either clockwise only or clockwise or counterclockwise.
1 2 For Linear, select whether the device returns to Position 1 for every move or moves
directly to the target position.
3 Select to reset a fault on a new Operator command.
2 4 Select to reset a fault on a new External command.
5 Select to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.

3
4

224 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Item Description
1 Select to enable device feedback for all positions.
1 Select to enable a new position command to be received and processed while a
2 move is in progress.
2 3 Select to keep a position output On until the next move.
3 4 Select to enable indexing cylinders with position feedback.
Select if the device must be unlocked to move and locked when the move is
4 5 complete.
5 6 Select to have Position 1 command always available to Operator control.
7 Select to have Position 1 command always available to External control.

Item Description
Select to enable whether an I/O Fault, Failure to Reach Position, or Lock Failure is
1 considered a shed condition.

1 The device always sheds on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is
displayed as a reminder that the Interlock Trip function always triggers a shed.

If a condition causes the device to shed, a reset is required to operate the device.
Select to determine whether the device holds the hold position or goes to position 1
2 upon a shed condition.
2

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 225

Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Item Description
1 Select yes to enable virtual.
1 2 Enter the time (0…2,147,483) to reach a target position in virtual.
3 Enter the time (0…2,147,483) to lock/unlock with the device in virtual.
4 Enter the time (0…2,147,483) to simulate index cylinder feedback in virtual.
2
5 Select to sound an audible on a commanded move from Position 1.
3 6 Select to sound an audible on a commanded move from any State.
Enter the time (in seconds) that the audible sounds when there is a commanded
7
4 State change.

5
6

226 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-faceplate
navigation settings. View the description, label, tag, and security area for the device.

Item Description
Name is displayed for each device position that is based on the number of
1
positions.

Item Description
Name is displayed for each device position that is based on the number of
1 positions.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 227

Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Item Description
Name is displayed for each device position that is based on the number of
1
positions.
Select to indicate that a permissive object is connected to the permissive inputs of
1 this object.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissives object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your raP_Dvc_nPos object
has the name ’nPos123’, then its Permissives object must be named ‘nPos123_Perm’
Select to indicate that an interlock object is connected to the interlock inputs of
this object.
2
3 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of
3 the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your raP_Dvc_nPos object has the
name ’nPos123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘nPos123_Intlk’.
4 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
set to true.)

4 You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the
extended tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing
tag>.@Library and <backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display
the objects faceplate.

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1 Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
3
after any operator command.
2

228 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 222 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 229

Chapter 22 n-Position Device (PNPOS)

Notes:

230 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23

Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative

(PPID)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
PPID_GS
GO_PPID GS_PPID Graphic Symbol with PV and CV numeric
displays.
The Optix graphic symbol can be configured to
show or hide the SP, PV, or CV.

GO_PPID1 GS_PPID1

Graphic Symbol with PV, SP, and CV numeric

— displays.

GO_PPID2 GS_PPID2
Graphic Symbol with SP and CV numeric
— displays

PPID_GS_TrendScaledByPV
GO_PPID_Trend
Graphic Symbol with PV and CV numeric
displays and a trend display that plots SP, PV,
High, and Low Deviations. The trend is scaled to
— PV EU Min and Max.

The Optix graphic symbol can be configured to

show or hide the SP, PV, or CV.

GO_PPID_Trend1

Graphic Symbol with PV, SP, and CV numeric

displays and a trend display that plots SP, PV,
— — High, and Low Deviations. The trend is scaled to
PV EU Min and Max.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 231

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
PPID_GS_TrendWTarget
GO_PPID_TrendWTarget
Graphic Symbol with PV and CV numeric
displays and a trend display that plots SP, PV,
High, and Low Deviations. The trend is scaled by
— using the High and Low Deviations.

The Optix graphic symbol can be configured to

show or hide the SP, PV, or CV.

GO_PPID_TrendWTarget1

Graphic Symbol with PV, SP, and CV numeric

displays and a trend display that plots SP, PV,
— — High, and Low Deviations. The trend is scaled by
using the High and Low Deviations.

GO_PPID_Indicator GS_PPID_Indicator

Bar graph with SP on the left and PV on the right

— that is scaled by PV EU minimum and maximum.

GO_PPID_Valve GS_PPID_Valve

GO_PPID_Valve1 GS_PPID_Valve1

—
Proportional Valve Graphic Symbol with PV and
CV numeric displays.

GO_PPID_Valve2 GS_PPID_Valve2

GO_PPID_Valve3 GS_PPID_Valve3

232 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
PPID_GS_ControlValve4
GO_PPID_Valve4 GS_PPID_Valve4

PPID_GS_ControlValve5
GO_PPID_Valve5 GS_PPID_Valve5

Proportional Valve Graphic Symbol with PV, CV,

and Setpoint numeric displays.

The Optix graphic symbol can be configured to

show or hide the SP, PV, or CV.

GO_PPID_Valve6 PPID_GS_ControlValve6 GS_PPID_Valve6

GO_PPID_Valve7 PPID_GS_ControlValve7 GS_PPID_Valve7

GO_PPID_Valve8 GS_PPID_Valve8

GO_PPID_Valve9 GS_PPID_Valve9

—
Proportional Valve Graphic Symbol with SP, CV,
and Setpoint numeric displays.

GO_PPID_Valve10 GS_PPID_Valve10

GO_PPID_Valve11 GS_PPID_Valve11

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 233

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PPID_Val_PV
— — PV indicator with label.

GO_PPID_PV1
— — PV indicator with label.

GO_PPID_PVSP
— — Indicator with PV and SP.

GO_PPID_Label
— — Label only

PPID_GS_LinearGauge
GO_PPID_Indicator

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— Includes displayed limits. Alarm indication.

GO_PPID_Indicator1

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— — Includes displayed limits. Alarm indication.

GO_PPID_Indicator2

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— — Includes displayed limits. Alarm indication and
PV value in tooltip.

GO_PPID_Indicator3

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— — Includes displayed limits. Alarm indication and
PV value in tooltip.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PPID_Indicator4

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— —
Includes displayed limits. PV value in tooltip.

GO_PPID_Indicator5

Bar indicator with PV and SP moving triangles.

— — Includes displayed limits. PV value in tooltip.

GO_PPID_Trend_L1

— — Trend with PV and SP values.

GO_PPID_Trend1_L1

— — Trend with PV and SP values.

GO_PPID_HistTrend1

— — Trend with PV and SP historical values.

GO_PPID_HistTrend2

— — Trend with PV and SP historical values.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 235

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PPID_Sparkline

— — PV indicated by real-time Sparkline

GO_PPID_Sparkline1

— — PV indicated by real-time Sparkline

GO_PPID_HistTrend3

— — PV indicated by Historical Sparkline

GO_PPID_HistTrend4

— — PV indicated by Historical Sparkline

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

236 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable (PV).
2 Bar graph for the current Process Variable.
3 Select to open the ramp wizard display.
4 Current Setpoint (SP).
1 8
5 Cascade loop mode.
2
6 Auto loop mode.
9
7 Manual loop mode
3 10
8 Current Control Variable (CV).
Enter a value for the loop setpoint.
11 9 IMPORTANT: This value can be entered only when the instruction command
source is Operator and the Loop mode is Automatic or Manual.
10 Bar graph for the current Control Variable.
11 Loop mode indicator.
5 6 7

Ramp Wizard Display

3

Item Description
1 4 1 Enter new target setpoint.
2 Ramp Time
2 5 3 Stop setpoint ramping.
4 Calculated rate of change.
5 Start setpoint ramping.

Maintenance Tab
2 3

Item Description
1 Threshold Name
2 Enter the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each alarm limit. Deadband helps
prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
3 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the
1 signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0
(90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Select No
4 to enable checking of all interlocks and permissives.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 237

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the Operator ratio.
2 Enter the maximum and minimum limits for the ratio.
1 3 Enter the Operator Setpoint for the Operator Loop mode.

Item Description
1 Enter the minimum and maximum limits for the setpoint
2 Enter the interlock setpoint.
1 3 Enter the setpoint rate of increase.
4 Enter the setpoint rate of decrease.

3
4

238 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
Enter the value for the zero-crossing deadband (in PV engineering units). When the
1 loop error is less than the zero-crossing deadband, the loop output does not
change.
Enter the maximum and minimum values of the PV range (span) (in PV engineering
2 units). The maximum value must be greater than the minimum.
1 3 3
2 Gains: Proportional

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Controller Gain
4 (unitless). This gain is applied to the Proportional, Integral, and Derivative terms.
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Proportional Gain (unitless). This
4 gain is applied to the Proportional term only.
5 A value of zero in either case disables the Proportional term of the controller.
6
Negative values are not valid.
Gains: Integral

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Integral Time Constant
5 (minutes pre-repeat).
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Integral Gain (1/minutes).
A value of zero in either case disables the Integral term of the controller. Negative
values are not valid.
Gains: Derivative

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Derivative Time
6 Constant (minutes).
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Derivative Gain (minutes).
A value of zero in either case disables the Derivative term of the controller.
Negative values are not valid.

Item Description
1 Enter the operator CV (when the PID is in manual mode).
1 Enter the minimum and maximum CV engineering units. These are used for scaling
2 the output.
3 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for increasing CV.
4 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for decreasing CV.
Enter the maximum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped
not to exceed the entered value. This value must be less than or equal to 100.0 and
2 5 greater than the CV Low Limit.
5
Enter the minimum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped
not to go below the entered value. This value must be greater than or equal to 0.0
and less than the CV High Limit.
3
4

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 239

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
Enter the value in percent to output as the CV when an Interlock input is not OK. The CV
1 is held at this
value until the interlock inputs are OK (subject to interlock bypassing).
1

Item Description
1 Enter the CV active threshold.
1 Process variable high high, high, low, and low low deviation threshold gate delay
2 (seconds).
2

240 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Tuning Tab

Item Description
1 Trend display for Process Variable, Setpoint, and Controlled Variable.
2 Setpoint data entry.
3 Tuning constant entries.
4 Process variable data entry
5 Cascade loop mode.
6 Auto loop mode.
7 Manual loop mode.

3 4

Engineering Tabs

Item Description
1 Enter the interval (in seconds) to execute the PID algorithm.
1 Select for reverse-acting loop response (default). When the PV increases, the CV (output)
2 decreases.
3 Select for direct-acting loop response. When the PV increases, the CV (output) increases.
2 Select to use the Independent Gains form of the PID algorithm. Changes to the
4 proportional gain do not affect integral or derivative response.
3
Select to use the Dependent Gains form of the PID algorithm (default). Changes to
5 Cfg_PGain are applied as loop gain changes and affect proportional, integral, and
4 derivative responses.
5 Select to enable derivative smoothing. Derivative smoothing can help reduce output jitter
due to noise on the PV signal.
6 Clear this checkbox to disable derivative smoothing. When derivative smoothing is
6
disabled, it can result in quicker loop response at high derivative gain.
7 Select whether the error is squared on proportional action or not. Squaring the error
7 minimizes the effect of a small error on the output.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 241

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
If the PV derivative deadband is exceeded, PID stops processing the error calculation
1
and the CV freezes.
1 If the PV derivative deadband is exceeded, the integral portion of the error calculation
2
2 will be suspended. The error calculation continues and the CV is updated.
Enter the value for PV deviation when the CV is approaching SP. A lower deadband
3 3 allows for less deviation in the PV. If the deviation deadband is reached, action is taken
according to items #1 or #2.
4 Enter the value for PV deviation when the CV is leaving the SP. A lower deadband allows
4 for less deviation in the PV. If the deviation deadband is reached, action is taken
5 according to items #1 or #2.
Enter value for beta gain. This is the weight (multiplier) of the proportional gain. If beta
6 5 is set to 0.0, the proportional gain has value. If beta is set to 1.0, the proportional gain
has full effect. This is configurable from 0.0 to 1.5.
Enter value for gamma gain. This is the weight (multiplier) of the derivative gain. If
7 6 gamma is set to 0.0, the derivative gain has value. If beta is set to 1.0, the derivative
gain has full effect. This is configurable from 0.0 to 1.5.
8
Select whether the CV response to the proportional and derivative gains is bumpless or
7 not.
Select if the proportional and derivative is bumpless during a loop mode change. This
8 is only enabled when the integral gain is set to 0

Item Description
1 Select to enable Auto Loop mode.
1 2 Select to enable Manual Loop mode.
2 3 Select to enable Cascade Loop mode.
4 Select to enable ratio multiplier in Cascade mode.
3
5 Select to disable normal loop made selection
4 6 Select to choose manual as the normal loop mode
7 Select to choose auto as the normal loop mode
5
8 Select to choose cascade as the normal loop mode.
6
7
8

242 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
1 Select to keep the Loop mode what it was at powerdown.
2 Select to set the Loop mode to Manual on powerup.
1
3 Select to set the Loop mode to Auto on powerup.
2
4 Select to set the loop mode to Cascade on powerup.
3 Enter a value to apply to the loop CV (in percent) on controller powerup. The CV is set to this
4 5 value on controller powerup in Run mode and on controller transition from Program mode
to Run mode.
Enter a value to apply to the loop setpoint (in PV engineering units) on controller powerup.
The setpoint is set to this value on controller powerup in Run mode and on controller
5 6 transition from Program mode
to Run mode.
6
7 Select to set the loop mode to the Normal loop mode on powerup.

7
8

Item Description
Select to set the Loop mode to Manual when the Use CVInit Value input is true. The loop is
1 left in manual with the CV at the initialization value when the initialization request clears.
1 Clear this checkbox to leave the loop in its current mode on an initialization request.
When the initialization request clears, the loop resumes controlling in its previous mode.
2
Select to have the current PV copied to the SP (track) whenever the loop is in Manual
2
3 mode.
Select to skip the setpoint rate of change limiting in Interlock Trip, Maintenance, or
4 3 Override.
5 4 Select to allow navigation to the setpoint Ramp Wizard Display from the Operator tab.
Enter a value for maximum deviation between SP and PV. If the deviation exceeds this
5
6 value, the SP ramp pauses until the PV returns to a value within the set deviation.
6 Select to disable CV clamping during Manual mode.
7
7 Select to disable CV rate of change during Manual mode.
8 Select to enable CV reset feedback tracking. This keeps the CV from ramping if the output
8 device or inner loop is significantly slower.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 243

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
1 Enter gain for CV tracking.
1 Select so that when this parameter is:
• On, the operator settings track the program settings when command source is
2 Program, and program settings track the operator settings when the command source
2 is Operator. Transition between command sources is bumpless.
3 • Off, the operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of
command source. When the command source is changed, the value of a limit can
4 change, such as from the Programset value to the Operator-set value.
Select so that Program and operator settings track when the command source is Hand or
3
5 Override.
4 Select to bypass Interlocks that can be bypassed while in Override command source.
5 Select the PV failure trigger.

Item Description
1 Possible Failures
1 2 For the given failure, do not change the CV operation, keep controlling.
3 For the given failure, hold the CV at the current value.
4 For the given failure, set the CV to the configured value.
2 5 For the given failure, do not change the SP operation.
3 6 For the given failure, hold the SP at the current value.
4
7 For the given failure, set the SP to the configured value.
8 For the given failure, have SP track the current PV value.
5
6 9 For the given failure, keep current loop mode.
7 10 For the given failure, set the loop mode to manual.
8
11 For the given failure, If loop made is cascade set to auto.

9
10
11

244 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
Select to keep control of loop mode commands with the Operator, Program, External, or
1 Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.
Select to keep control of the controlled variable quantity setting with the Operator,
2 Program, External, or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.
Select to keep control of the setpoint settings with the Operator, Program, External, or
3 Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.
1
Select to keep control of the ratio settings with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow
4
2 the Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the PV engineering units for display on the HMI.
2 Enter the CV engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default
3 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Process Variable
4 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Control Variable
1 5 Enter the number of decimal places that are displayed for the ratio (cascade)
2 6 Select to enable navigation to the Interlock object.

3
4

5
6

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 245

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
3
2 after any operator command.

Item Description
1 Select to configure if a Historical data source will be used or not.
1
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
2 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.
3 Select to enable navigation to the CV object.
4 Select to enable navigation to the PV object.
2
5 Select to enable navigation to Cascade SP object.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 236 for descriptions of the
features.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 247

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 236 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab
4 5

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable (PV).
2 Bar graph for the current Process Variable.
3 Select to open the ramp wizard display.
1 9 4 Current Setpoint (SP).
5 Current Ratio (Ratio) if Cfg_HasCasc is true and Cfg_HasRatio is true.
2 10 6 Cascade loop mode.
11 7 Auto loop mode.
8 Manual loop mode
9 Current Control Variable (CV).
3 12 Enter a value for the loop setpoint.
IMPORTANT: This value can be entered only when the instruction
10 command source is Operator and the Loop mode is Automatic or
Manual.
11 Bar graph for the current Control Variable.
6 7 8
12 Loop mode indicator.

Ramp Wizard

3
Item Description
1 Enter new target setpoint.
1 4
2 Ramp Time
2 5 3 Stop setpoint ramping.
4 Calculated rate of change.
5 Start setpoint ramping.

248 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Maintenance Tab - Deviation Limits

2 3
Item Description
1 Threshold Name
2 Enter the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
Enter the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each alarm limit.
Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous
spurious alarms.
3 Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband
is 5, once the signal rises above 90.0 and generates a High alarm. The
1 signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.

Maintenance Tab - Interlocks

Item Description
Select Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and
1 permissives. Select No to enable checking of all interlocks and
permissives.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 249

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Tuning Tab

2

Item Description
1 Trend display for Process Variable, Setpoint, and Controlled Variable.
2 Setpoint data entry.
3 Control variable data entry.
4 Tuning constant entries.
5 Cascade loop mode.
6 Auto loop mode.
7 Manual loop mode.
1

3 4

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Ratio SAMA

Item Description
1 Enter the Operator ratio.
2 Enter the maximum and minimum limits for the ratio.
1

250 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - SP SAMA

Item Description
1 Enter the Operator Setpoint for the Operator Loop mode.
2 Enter the minimum and maximum limits for the setpoint.
1 3 Enter the interlock setpoint.
4 Enter the setpoint rate of increase.
5 Enter the setpoint rate of decrease.

4
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 251

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Error and Gains SAMA

Item Description
Enter the value for the zero-crossing deadband (in PV engineering units). When the
1 loop error is less than the zero-crossing deadband, the loop output does not
change.
Enter the maximum and minimum values of the PV range (span) (in PV engineering
2 units). The maximum value must be greater than the minimum.
Enter the value for the deviation deadband threshold for the PV going away from
3 the setpoint. The PID continues updating the CV when the PV leaves deadband.
1 3
Gains: Proportional
2
This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Dependent.
If Cfg_Dependent = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Controller Gain
4 (unitless). This gain is applied to the Proportional, Integral, and Derivative terms.
If Cfg_Dependent = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Proportional Gain (unitless).
This gain is applied to the Proportional term only.
4 A value of zero in either case disables the Proportional term of the controller.
5 Negative values are not valid.
6 Gains: Integral

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Dependent.

If Cfg_Dependent = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Integral Time

5 Constant (minutes pre-repeat).

If Cfg_Dependent = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Integral Gain (1/minutes).

A value of zero in either case disables the Integral term of the controller. Negative
values are not valid.
Gains: Derivative

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Dependent.

If Cfg_Dependent = 1 (dependent gains, the default), Enter the Derivative Time

6 Constant (minutes).

If Cfg_Dependent = 0 (independent gains), Enter the Derivative Gain (minutes).

A value of zero in either case disables the Derivative term of the controller.
Negative values are not valid.

252 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - CV SAMA

Item Description
1 Enter the operator CV (when the PID is in manual mode).
Enter the minimum and maximum CV engineering units. These are used for scaling
1 2 the output.
3 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for increasing CV.
4 Enter the values for the maximum rate of change for decreasing CV.
Enter the value in percent to output as the CV when an Interlock input is not OK. The
5 CV is held at this value until the interlock inputs are OK (subject to interlock
bypassing).
Enter the maximum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped not
2 6 to exceed the entered value. This value must be less than or equal to 100.0 and
greater than the CV Low Limit.
6
Enter the minimum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped not
to go below the entered value. This value must be greater than or equal to 0.0 and
3 less than the CV High Limit.
4

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Timers

Item Description
Process variable high high, high, low, and low low deviation threshold gate delay
1 (seconds).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 253

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Maintenance Tab - Properties

Item Description
1 Enter the CV active threshold.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Features

Item Description
1 Select to enable Auto Loop mode.
1 2 Select to enable Manual Loop mode.
2 3 Select to enable Cascade Loop mode.
3 4 Select to enable ratio multiplier in Cascade mode.
4 5 Select to allow navigation to the setpoint Ramp Wizard Display from the Operator tab.
5 6 Select to disable normal loop mode selection.
7 Select to choose manual as the normal loop mode.
6
8 Select to choose auto as the normal loop mode.
7
8 9 Select to choose cascade as the normal loop mode.
9 10 Select to lock the loop in the mode configured as Normal.
10

254 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Behavior

Item Description
Select so that when this parameter is:
• On, the operator settings track the program settings when command source is
Program, and program settings track the operator settings when the command
1 1 source is Operator. Transition between command sources is bumpless.
• Off, the operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of
2 command source. When the command source is changed, the value of a limit can
change, such as from the Programset value to the Operator-set value.
3
Select so that Program and operator settings track when the command source is Hand
2 or Override.
3 Select to bypass Interlocks that can be bypassed while in Override command source.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Algorithm

Item Description
1 Enter the interval (in seconds) to execute the PID algorithm.
Select to enable derivative smoothing. Derivative smoothing can help reduce output
jitter due to noise on the PV signal. Clear this checkbox to disable derivative smoothing.
2 When derivative smoothing is disabled, it can result in quicker loop response at high
derivative gain.
1 Select whether the error is squared on proportional action or not. Squaring the error
3 minimizes the effect of a small error on the output.
2
Select for reverse-acting loop response (default). When the PV increases, the CV
3 4 (output) decreases.
Select for direct-acting loop response. When the PV increases, the CV (output)
4 5 increases.
5
Select to use the Independent Gains form of the PID algorithm. Changes to the
6 proportional gain do not affect integral or derivative response.
6
Select to use the Dependent Gains form of the PID algorithm (default). Changes to
7
7 Cfg_PGain are applied as loop gain changes and affect proportional, integral, and
derivative responses.
8
Select whether the CV response to the proportional and derivative gains is bumpless or
9 8 not.
Select if the proportional and derivative is bumpless during a loop mode change. This is
9 only enabled when the integral gain is set to 0

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 255

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Engineering Tab - SP Behavior

Item Description
Select to have the current PV copied to the SP (track) whenever the loop is in Manual
1 mode.
Select to skip the setpoint rate of change limiting in Interlock Trip, Maintenance, or
2 Override.
Enter value for beta gain. This is the weight (multiplier) of the proportional gain. If beta
3 is set to 0.0, the proportional gain has value. If beta is set to 1.0, the proportional gain
1 has full effect. This is configurable from 0.0 to 1.5.
2 Enter value for gamma gain. This is the weight (multiplier) of the derivative gain. If
4 gamma is set to 0.0, the derivative gain has value. If beta is set to 1.0, the derivative
3 gain has full effect. This is configurable from 0.0 to 1.5.
Enter a value for maximum deviation between SP and PV. If the deviation exceeds this
4 5 value, the SP ramp pauses until the PV returns to a value within the set deviation.
5

Advanced Engineering Tab - PV Behavior

Item Description
If the PV derivative deadband is exceeded, PID stops processing the error calculation
1 and the CV freezes.
If the PV derivative deadband is exceeded, the integral portion of the error calculation
2 will be suspended. The error calculation continues and the CV is updated.
Enter the value for PV deviation when the CV is approaching SP. A lower deadband
3 allows for less deviation in the PV. If the deviation deadband is reached, action is taken
1 according to items #1 or #2.
2 Enter the value for PV deviation when the CV is leaving the SP. A lower deadband allows
4 for less deviation in the PV. If the deviation deadband is reached, action is taken
3 according to items #1 or #2.
4
5 Select the PV failure trigger.

256 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Engineering Tab - CV Behavior

Item Description
1 Select to disable CV clamping during Manual mode.
2 Select to disable CV rate of change during Manual mode.
Select to enable CV reset feedback tracking. This keeps the CV from ramping if the
3 output device or inner loop is significantly slower.
4 Enter gain for CV tracking.

1
2

Advanced Engineering Tab - Device Initialization

Item Description
Select to set the Loop mode to Manual when the Use CVInit Value input is true. The loop
is left in manual with the CV at the initialization value when the initialization request
1 clears. Clear this checkbox to leave the loop in its current mode on an initialization
request. When the initialization request clears, the loop resumes controlling in its
previous mode.
2 Select to keep the Loop mode what it was at powerdown.
1
3 Select to set the Loop mode to Manual on powerup.
2
4 Select to set the Loop mode to Auto on powerup.
3 5 Select to set the Loop mode to Cascade on powerup.
4 6 Select to use the Normal loop mode configuration on powerup.
5
6
Selection of Powerup (first run) CV in Auto or Cascade.
0 = Ignore Inp_InnerAvailable and always use Cfg_CVPwrUp or last (Powerdown) CV (if
7
7 Cfg_PwrUpLM = 0),
1 = Process Inp_InnerAvailable.
Enter a value to apply to the loop setpoint (in PV engineering units) on controller
8 8 powerup. The setpoint is set to this value on controller powerup in Run mode and on
controller transition from Program mode to Run mode.
9 Enter a value to apply to the loop CV (in percent) on controller powerup. The CV is set to
9 this value on controller powerup in Run mode and on controller transition from Program
mode to Run mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 257

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Fail Action

Item Description
1 Possible Failures.
2 For the given failure, do not change the CV operation, keep controlling.
3 For the given failure, hold the CV at the current value.
4 For the given failure, set the CV to the configured value.
1 5 For the given failure, do not change the SP operation.
6 For the given failure, hold the SP at the current value.
7 For the given failure, set the SP to the configured value.
8 For the given failure, have SP track the current PV value.
2 9 For the given failure, keep current loop mode.
3
10 For the given failure, set the loop mode to manual.
4
11 For the given failure, If loop made is cascade set to auto.
5
6
7
8

9
10
11

Advanced CmdSrc Tab - Command Source Exceptions

Item Description
Select to keep control of loop mode commands with the Operator, Program, External,
1 or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the controlled variable quantity setting with the Operator,
2 Program, External, or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the setpoint settings with the Operator, Program, External,
3 or Follow the Source.
Select to keep control of the ratio settings with the Operator, Program, External, or
4 Follow the Source.

1
2
3
4

258 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Units and Precision

Item Description
1 Display the PV engineering units.
2 Display the CV engineering units. Percent (%) is the default.
3 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Process Variable.
1
2 4 Enter in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Control Variable.
5 Enter the number of decimal places that are displayed for the ratio (cascade).
3

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab - Navigation

Item Description
1 Select to enable navigation to Cascade SP object.
2 Select to enable navigation to the PV object.
3 Select to enable navigation to the CV object.
4 Select to enable navigation to the Interlock object.
1 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to
true.)
2 5 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.
3
4
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 259

Chapter 23 Process Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PPID)

Notes:

260 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 24

Process Permissive (PPERM)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Description
Symbol
GO_PPERM PPERM_GS

Standard Permissive Global Object.

Permissive States
Image Description

Not ready to run or energize. One or more permissive conditions are not OK.

Ready to run or energize. One or more conditions that can be bypassed are not OK, but these
conditions are bypassed. All conditions that cannot be bypassed are OK.

Ready to run or energize. All permissive conditions are OK.

Ready to run or energize, and all permissive conditions are OK, conditions that can be
bypassed are being bypassed and the equipment is not shut down.

The overall graphic symbol includes a touch field over it that opens the faceplate. Hover the
pointing device over the graphic symbol to display a tooltip that describes the function of the
symbol.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 261

Chapter 24 Process Permissive (PPERM)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Permissive bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured permissive along with the current state of the permissive

If navigation is enabled, Select the condition to open the faceplate of the object that is
associated with the condition.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select an active permissive, one that has a white checkbox, to enable
1 bypass of that individual permissive.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 24 Process Permissive (PPERM)

Engineering Tabs

1 2 3

Item Description
Enter the text description of each permissive condition used. Only the permissives with text
1 entered appear on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
2 Selects the state of the corresponding permissive that is the OK to Run state.
3 Select to indicate that the corresponding permissive can be bypassed.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
1 This can be configured to navigate to an object backing tag or a UDT tag that has
Instruction and Library defined.
2 Select to allow navigation to Permissive Input objects.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 263

Chapter 24 Process Permissive (PPERM)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 262 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

264 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 24 Process Permissive (PPERM)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 262 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Permissive bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured permissive along with the current state of the permissive

If navigation is enabled, Select the condition to open the faceplate of the object that is
associated with the condition.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select an active permissive, one that has a white checkbox, to enable
1 bypass of that individual permissive.
1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 265

Chapter 24 Process Permissive (PPERM)

Advanced Engineering Tab

2 3
Item Description
The text description of each permissive condition used. Only the permissives
1 with text entered appear on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
2 Selects the state of the corresponding permissive that is the OK to Run state.
3 Select to indicate that the corresponding permissive can be bypassed.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Select to allow navigation to Permissive Input objects.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
2 (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.) This can be configured to navigate to an object
backing tag or a UDT tag that has Instruction and Library defined.
1

266 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 25

Process Pressure/Temperature Compensated

Flow (PPTC)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
Graphic Symbol Name Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol

Standard pressure / temperature compensated flow graphic

GO_PPTC symbol

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The
Trends tab, Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and
Faceplates are not described in this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 The compensated flow (at standard temperature and pressure).
2 Actual (measured) uncompensated flow in volumetric units.
2
3 The actual (measured) pressure. Can be absolute or common units.
3 4 The actual (measured) temperature.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 267

Chapter 25 Process Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (PPTC)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the flow value. Any flow below this value will be reported as 0.
1

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the full-scale differential pressure reference.
1 2 Enter the flow at the reference differential pressure.
3 Enter the zero input-unit pressure. This is the pressure offset (usually 14.696 PSIA).
2
Enter the zero input-unit temperature. This is the temperature offset (usually 273.15 K
4
3 or 459.67 Rankine).
5 Enter the standard pressure value.
4 6 Enter the standard temperature value.
5 7 Select the flow calculation method.

61

268 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 25 Process Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (PPTC)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays units

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 267 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 269

Chapter 25 Process Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (PPTC)

Notes:

270 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 26

Process Restart Inhibit (PRI)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
Graphic Symbol Name Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol

GO_PRI Standard Restart Inhibit Graphic Symbol.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
1

4 5 6 7

Item Description
1 Enter the time, in hours, for a stopped hot motor to cool.
2 Enter the time, in hours, during which three motor starts turn a cold motor to hot.
3 Enter the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a cold motor the first time.
4 Enter the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a cold motor two or more times.
5 Enter the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a hot motor the first time.
6 Enter the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a hot motor two or more times.
7 Enter the time, in hours, to wait after stopping a running hot motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 271

Chapter 26 Process Restart Inhibit (PRI)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 271 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

272 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 27

Process Run Time (PRT) Graphic

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PRT PRT_GS
GS_PRT

Standard Run Time Graphic Symbol.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Select to clear maximum continuous running time for any given start.
2 Select to clear total running time.
1 3 Select to clear total number of motor starts or start attempts.

Advanced Tab
The Advanced Tab shows the HMI text that has been configured.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 273

Chapter 27 Process Run Time (PRT) Graphic

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 273 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

274 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 27 Process Run Time (PRT) Graphic

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk® View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 273 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Select to clear maximum continuous running time for any given start.
2 Select to clear total running time.
1 3 Select to clear total number of motor starts or start attempts.

Advanced Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 275

Chapter 27 Process Run Time (PRT) Graphic

Notes:

276 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 28

Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Graphic Symbol

GO_PTST Standard tank strapping table graphic symbol

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Displays gross tank volume.
1
2 Displays free water volume.
2 3 Displays raw (observed) volume.
4 Displays calculated tank temperature.
3 5 Displays correction for tank temperature
4 6 Displays floating roof adjustment volume

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 277

Chapter 28 Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Enter temperature of tank calibration (typically 60 F or 15 C)
1 2 Enter degrees API for which the table includes floating roof data.
3 Enter the lowest level at which to add or subtract floating roof compensation.
2 Enter adjustment to table values for API <> CalAPI (volume/degress API, typically a
4 negative number).
3 5 Enter temperature weighting (0.0 for insulated tank). See API MPMS 2.2A Appendix D.
Enter table minor units in inches, cm, mm, per major unit (feet or meters). Enter 0.0 if
6
4 minor units are not used.
Enter tank shell linear coefficient of thermal expansion (1 per degree Fahrenheit or 1
7 per Celsius).
5

Item Description
1 Select to include the tank shell temperature correction.
1 2 Select to include the floating roof adjustment for calculating fluid level.

278 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 28 Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Display units
2 Select to enable navigation to another object as a reference.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 277 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 279

Chapter 28 Process Tank Strapping Table (PTST)

Notes:

280 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29

Process Valve (PVLV)

The PVLV Add-On Instruction can be configured to be a Hand Operated, Motor Operated, or
Solenoid Operated valve.

Graphic Symbols
(Configured as Hand
Operated Valve)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol
PVLV_GS_Valve

GO_PVLV_HO
GS_PVLV_HO
PVLV_GS_Valve_L

GO_PVLV_HO1 GS_PVLV_HO1
PVLV_GS_Valve_R

Hand-operated Valves that are shown in

various orientations.

The FactoryTalk Optix PVLV graphic

GO_PVLV_HO2 PVLV_GS_Valve_B symbols have configurable actuator that
GS_PVLV_HO2
can show either a Motor Operated, Solenoid
Operated, or Hand Operated Actuator.

GO_PVLV_HO3 GS_PVLV_HO3
PVLV_GS_Text

PVLV_GS_Symbol

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 281

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.
Hand Operated Valve)
Operator Tab

Item Description
1 Valve state indicator.
1
2 Select to trip the valve “Open” or “Closed” depending on the valve configuration.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to configure the valve to use the closed limit switch.
1 Clear the checkbox to bypass the closed limit switch temporarily.
1 Select to configure the valve to use the open limit switch.
2
2 Clear the checkbox to bypass the closed limit switch temporarily.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
Enter the amount of time that the valve is not confirmed open or closed before a
1 2 Transit Stall.
2 Enter the amount of time to allow the valve to reach its trip position after a trip
3 command is received before raising a trip fail alarm.
3 Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve
4 before changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Open feedback.
Select ‘ON’ if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal
operation.
Select ‘OFF’ if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in normal
4
2 operation.
This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal
3 operation.
Select to allow the operator trip command to reset any previous faults (I/O fault,
4 5 fail to trip, interlock trip), then trip the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
5

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 283

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
Select if a trip output is connected to the PVLV instruction to trip the valve on an
1
1 interlock or trip command. This selection makes the trip command button visible
on the operator tab.
2 Select if triggering the trip output causes the valve to open. Clear the checkbox
(default) if triggering the trip output causes the valve to close.
2 Note: This generally corresponds to the “fail” or “spring return” position of the
valve. selected for a “fail open” valve or cleared for a “fail closed” valve.

Item Description
Select the options for when to send the trip output to the valve if a fault is
1 detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the fault status/alarm and not trip the valve if a
1 fault is detected.
The valve always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is
displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the valve.
Select to keep sending the trip output to the valve on a trip, even if position
feedback does not confirm the valve reached the trip position.
2 Clear this checkbox to stop sending the trip output to the valve when the valve trip
times out and the fail to trip status is set.
Configure the amount of time the valve status shows ‘tripping’ before showing an
3
2 opened or closed status when the valve is tripped and I/O are being simulated.
4 Enable or disable virtual mode.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
3 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
4 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.

1
2

Item Description
Select if the Valve Stats instruction. For example, PVLVS is used with this device.
1 This check adds a button to the faceplate that opens the Valve Stats faceplate.

2 1 IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Statistics object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your PVLV object
has the name ’ValveHO123’, then its valve statistics object must be named
‘ValveHO123_ValveStats’.
Select if an Interlock object is used with this valve. This check changes the
Interlock indicator to a clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
3
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the interlock object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
’ValveHO123’, then its interlock object must be named ‘ValveHO123_Intlk’.
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
3 after any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
4 set to true.)
You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the
4 extended tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing
tag>.@Library and <backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display
the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 285

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Hand Operated Valve)
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Hand Operated Valve)
on page 282 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

286 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Hand Operated Valve)
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Hand Operated Valve) on
page 282 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Valve state indicator.
Select to trip the valve "Open" or "Closed" depending on the valve
2 configuration.

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Select to configure the valve to use the closed limit switch.
1 Clear the checkbox to bypass the closed limit switch temporarily.
Select to configure the valve to use the open limit switch.
2
1 Clear the checkbox to bypass the closed limit switch temporarily.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 287

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
Enter the amount of time that the valve is not confirmed open or closed before a
1 2 Transit Stall.
2 Enter the amount of time to allow the valve to reach its trip position after a trip
3 command is received before raising a trip fail alarm.
3 Configure the amount of time the valve status shows 'tripping' before showing an
4 opened or closed status when the valve is tripped and I/O are being simulated.
Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve before
4 5 changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Open feedback.
Select if a trip output is connected to the PVLV instruction to trip the valve on an
4 interlock or trip command. This selection makes the trip command button visible on
the operator tab.
2
Select if triggering the trip output causes the valve to open. Clear the checkbox
3 (default) if triggering the trip output causes the valve to close.
5
4 Note: This generally corresponds to the "fail" or "spring return" position of the valve.
5 selected for a "fail open" valve or cleared for a "fail closed" valve.

288 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior

Item Description
Select to allow the operator trip command to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to
1 trip, interlock trip), then trip the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
1 Select to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit stall,
2
2 full stall, interlock trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command.
3
Select the options for when to send the trip output to the valve if a fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the fault status/alarm and not trip the valve if a fault
is detected.
3 The valve always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed
as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the valve.

4 Select to keep sending the trip output to the valve on a trip, even if position feedback
5 does not confirm the valve reached the trip position.
4 Clear this checkbox to stop sending the trip output to the valve when the valve trip
times out and the fail to trip status is set.
Select 'ON' if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal operation.
6 Select 'OFF' if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in normal operation.
5 This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal
operation.
6 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
Select if an Interlock object is used with this valve. This check changes the Interlock
indicator to a clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
3 IMPORTANT: The name of the interlock object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix '_Intlk'. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
'ValveHO123', then its interlock object must be named 'ValveHO123_Intlk'.
1 Select if the Valve Stats instruction. For example, PVLVS is used with this device. This
check adds a button to the faceplate that opens the Valve Stats faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Statistics object in the controller must be the
4 name of the object with the suffix '_ValveStats'. For example, if your PVLV object has
the name 'ValveHO123', then its valve statistics object must be named
'ValveHO123_ValveStats'.
3 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
4 set to true.)
5 You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended
5 tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the .@Library and .@Instruction
extended tag properties to display the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 289

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Alarm Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
1 2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
2

290 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Graphic Symbols
(Configured as Motorized
Valve)
Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol Description
Graphic Symbol
PVLV_GS_Valve

GO_PVLV_MO
GS_PVLV_MO
PVLV_GS_Valve_L

GO_PVLV_MO1 GS_PVLV_MO1
PVLV_GS_Valve_R

Standard motor-operated valves that are

shown in various orientations.

PVLV_GS_Valve_B The FactoryTalk Optix PVLV graphic symbols

GO_PVLV_MO2 GS_PVLV_MO2 have configurable actuator that can show either
a Motor Operated, Solenoid Operated, or Hand
Operated Actuator.

GO_PVLV_MO3 GS_PVLV_MO3
PVLV_GS_Text

PVLV_GS_Symbol

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 291

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.
Motorized Valve)
Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Valve state indicator.
2 Select to issue the valve Stop command.
3 Select to open valve.
4 Select to close valve.

2
3
4

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select to open the Valve Statistics faceplate.
2 Select to use Valve Closed feedback for failure checking.
2 3 Select to use Valve Opened feedback for failure checking.
4 Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed.
3

292 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the valve is not confirmed open or
1 2 closed before a Transit Stall.
2 Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve
3 before changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Opened feedback.
Select ‘ON’ if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal
operation.
Select ‘OFF’ if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in normal
4
2 operation.
This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal
3 operation.
Select to allow operator commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to
4 5 trip, interlock trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
5 Select to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit
6 stall, full stall, interlock trip), then move the valve.
6 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 293

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
When selected, the bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed when
1 1 Override command source is selected. When the checkbox is cleared, the
bypassable interlocks and permissives are enforced in Override.
2 When selected, the Operator command button to close the valve is available even
when a command source other than Operator or Maintenance is selected. When
3 2 the checkbox is cleared, the Operator close command button is only enabled in
Operator or Maintenance command source.
4
When selected, the Program open command pin is treated as a level input: when 1,
5 the valve is commanded to open, and when 0 the valve is commanded to close.
3 When the checkbox is cleared, the Program commands follow the normal
command convention: write a 1 to the Program open command to open the valve,
and write a 1 to the Program close command to close the valve
When selected, the valve Stop command is enabled and commanding the valve in
6 the opposite direction while moving is permitted. When the checkbox is cleared,
4 the valve Stop command is hidden, and a valve command to the opposite direction
7 is not accepted while the initial move is in progress.
8 When selected, if the valve is stopped and limit switches then indicate the valve
has reached the opened or closed position, the valve state changes to opened or
5 closed, as appropriate. When the checkbox is cleared, if the valve is stopped, the
state shows stopped until the valve is commanded to a position, even if limit
switch inputs change state.
When selected, outputs are maintained on, even when the valve reaches the target
6 position. When the checkbox is cleared, outputs are turned off once the valve
reaches the target position.
When selected, outputs are maintained on when a valve has a full stall (failed to
7 move) or transit stall (failed to reach target position). When the checkbox is
cleared, outputs are turned off when a valve stall occurs.
When selected, the stop output is maintained, even if the valve coasts into the
opened or closed position. When the checkbox is cleared, the stop output is
8 cleared if the valve coasts into the opened or closed position after a stop is
commanded.

Item Description
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when an I/O Fault condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an I/
1 1 O Fault condition.
2 IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a
reset is required before the valve can be energized.
3
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
4 when a Transit Stall condition occurs.
5 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
trying) on a Transit Stall condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when
2
6 commanded to move, moved off its original position, but did not reach its
commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
7
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Transit Stall condition occurs,
a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
8
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
9 when a Full Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
3 trying) on a Full Stall condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded to
10
move, did not move off its original position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Full Stall condition occurs, a
reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when a Loss of Open Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
trying) on a Loss of Open Position condition. (A Loss of Open Position means that
4 the valve was commanded to open, reached the open position as confirmed by the
limit switches, and then moved off the open position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Open Position
condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
trying) on a Loss of Closed Position condition. (A Loss of Closed Position means
5 that the valve was commanded to close, reached the closed position as confirmed
by the limit switches, and then moved off the closed position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Closed Position
condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when an Actuator Fault condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an
6 Actuator Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and an Actuator Fault condition
occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
The device always de-energizes on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared.
7 It is displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always de-energizes the
valve.
8 Enter the seconds to sound an audible alarm when the valve energizes.
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed
9 back when Simulation is enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.
10 Enable or disable virtual mode.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
3 Displays the command text for Position 1.
4 Displays the command text for Position 2.
1
5 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2 6 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
3
4

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 295

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the Valve
1 Statistics button visible on the Maintenance faceplate; Select this button to open
the Valve Statistics faceplate for this valve.
2 1 IMPORTANT: The name of the ValveStats object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your PVLV object has the
3 name ‘ValveMO123’, then its Valve Stats object must be named
‘ValveMO123_ValveStats’.
4
Select if an interlock instruction is used with this output.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name
5 2 of the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
’ValveMO123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘ValveMO123_Intlk’
Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Open
Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to
open the Permissive faceplate.
3 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix ‘_Pos2Perm’. For example, if your PVLV object
6
has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its Permissive object must be named
‘ValveMO123_Pos2Perm’.
Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Close
Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to
open the Permissive faceplate.
4 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix ‘_Pos1Perm’. For example, if your PVLV object
has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its Permissive object must be named
‘ValveMO123_Pos1Perm’.
5 Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
after any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
set to true.)
You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the
6 extended tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing
tag>.@Library and <backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display
the objects faceplate.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Motorized Valve)
Studio 5000 View Designer faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View
SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Motorized Valve) on
page 292 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 297

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Motorized Valve)
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Motorized Valve) on page 292
for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1
1 Valve state indicator.
2 Select to issue the valve Stop command.
3 Select to open valve.
4 Select to close valve.

2
3
4

Maintenance Tab
1

Item Description
1 Select to open the Valve Statistics faceplate.
2 Select to use Valve Closed feedback for failure checking.
3 Select to use Valve Opened feedback for failure checking.
2 Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be
4 bypassed.
3

298 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
Enter the amount of time that the valve is not confirmed open or closed before a
1 2 Transit Stall.
3 Enter the seconds to sound an audible alarm when the valve energizes.
2
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed back
4 when Simulation is enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.
3
Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve before
5 changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).
4

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Open feedback.

2
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 299

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

19

Item Description
Select to allow operator commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to trip, interlock trip), then move the valve.
1 Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
Select to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit stall, full stall, interlock trip), then move the valve.
2 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command
When selected, the bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed when Override command source is selected. When the checkbox is cleared, the
3 bypassable interlocks and permissives are enforced in Override.
When selected, the Operator command button to close the valve is available even when a command source other than Operator or Maintenance is selected.
4 When the checkbox is cleared, the Operator close command button is only enabled in Operator or Maintenance command source.
When selected, the Program open command pin is treated as a level input: when 1, the valve is commanded to open, and when 0 the valve is commanded to
5 close. When the checkbox is cleared, the Program commands follow the normal command convention: write a 1 to the Program open command to open the
valve, and write a 1 to the Program close command to close the valve.
When selected, the valve Stop command is enabled and commanding the valve in the opposite direction while moving is permitted. When the checkbox is
6 cleared, the valve Stop command is hidden, and a valve command to the opposite direction is not accepted while the initial move is in progress.
When selected, if the valve is stopped and limit switches then indicate the valve has reached the opened or closed position, the valve state changes to opened
7 or closed, as appropriate. When the checkbox is cleared, if the valve is stopped, the state shows stopped until the valve is commanded to a position, even if
limit switch inputs change state.
When selected, outputs are maintained on, even when the valve reaches the target position. When the checkbox is cleared, outputs are turned off once the
8 valve reaches the target position.
When selected, outputs are maintained on when a valve has a full stall (failed to move) or transit stall (failed to reach target position). When the checkbox is
9 cleared, outputs are turned off when a valve stall occurs.
When selected, the stop output is maintained, even if the valve coasts into the opened or closed position. When the checkbox is cleared, the stop output is
10 cleared if the valve coasts into the opened or closed position after a stop is commanded.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when an I/O Fault condition occurs.
11 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an I/O Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Transit Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Transit Stall condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when
12 commanded to move, moved off its original position, but did not reach its commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Transit Stall condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Full Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Full Stall condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded
13 to move, did not move off its original position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Full Stall condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Loss of Open Position condition occurs. Clear this checkbox to keep the
outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Loss of Open Position condition. (A Loss of Open Position means that the valve was commanded to
14 open, reached the open position as confirmed by the limit switches, and then moved off the open position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Open Position condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Loss of Closed Position condition. (A Loss of Closed Position means
15 that the valve was commanded to close, reached the closed position as confirmed by the limit switches, and then moved off the closed position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when an Actuator Fault condition occurs.
16 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an Actuator Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and an Actuator Fault condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
The device always de-energizes on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always de-energizes
17 the valve.
Select 'ON' if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal operation. Select 'OFF' if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in
18 normal operation. This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal operation.
19 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
3 Displays the command text for Position 1.
1 4 Displays the command text for Position 2.
2 Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Close
Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to open
the Permissive faceplate.
5 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
3 the object with the suffix '_Pos1Perm'. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
4 'ValveMO123', then its Permissive object must be named 'ValveMO123_Pos1Perm'.
Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Open
Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to open
the Permissive faceplate.
6 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of
5 the object with the suffix '_Pos2Perm'. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
6
'ValveMO123', then its Permissive object must be named 'ValveMO123_Pos2Perm'.
Select if an interlock instruction is used with this output.
7 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
7
8 object with the suffix '_Intlk'. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
'ValveMO123', then its Interlock object must be named 'ValveMO123_Intlk'
9
Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the Valve
Statistics button visible on the Maintenance faceplate; Select this button to open the
Valve Statistics faceplate for this valve.
8 IMPORTANT: The name of the ValveStats object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix '_ValveStats'. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
'ValveMO123', then its Valve Stats object must be named 'ValveMO123_ValveStats'.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
9 You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended
tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the .@Library and .@Instruction
extended tag properties to display the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 301

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Graphic Symbols
(Configured as Solenoid
Operated Valve)
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Symbol PV5000 Graphic Symbol Description
PVLV_GS_Valve

GO_PVLV_SO
GS_PVLV_SO
PVLV_GS_Valve_L

GO_PVLV_SO1 GS_PVLV_SO1
PVLV_GS_Valve_R

Standard solenoid-operated valves that are

shown in various orientations.

The FactoryTalk Optix PVLV graphic symbols

PVLV_GS_Valve_B have configurable actuator that can show either
GO_PVLV_SO2 GS_PVLV_SO2 a Motor Operated, Solenoid Operated, or Hand
Operated Actuator.

GO_PVLV_SO3 GS_PVLV_SO3
PVLV_GS_Text

PVLV_GS_Symbol

302 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.
Solenoid Operated Valve)
Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Valve state indicator.
2 Select to have the valve pulse open.
3 Select to have the valve pulse closed.
4 Select to have the valve pulse continuously.
5 Select to open valve.
6 Select to close valve.

2 3 4 5 6

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select to open the Valve Statistics faceplate.
2 Select to use Valve Closed feedback for failure checking.
2 3 Select to use Valve Opened feedback for failure checking.
4 Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed.
3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 303

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
1 Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the valve is not confirmed open or closed
2 before a Transit Stall.
2 Enter the amount of time to pulse outputs to the valve (in seconds). Enter 0 if outputs
3 to the valve should be maintained on indefinitely once energized.
3 Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve before
4 changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).
Enter the amount of time to pulse the open and close outputs when commanding the
4 5 valve. Enter zero if the outputs are to be maintained until the valve reaches the target
position.
5

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Opened feedback.
Select ‘ON’ if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal
operation.
Select ‘OFF’ if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in normal
4 operation.
2
This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal
3
operation.
Select to allow operator commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to
4 5 trip, interlock trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
Select to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit
5 6 stall, full stall, interlock trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command
6

304 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
When selected, the bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed when
1 1 Override command source is selected. When the checkbox is cleared, the
bypassable interlocks and permissives are enforced in Override.
2 When selected, the Operator command button to close the valve is available even
when a command source other than Operator or Maintenance is selected. When
3 2 the checkbox is cleared, the Operator close command button is only enabled in
Operator or Maintenance command source.
4
When selected, the Program open command is pin is treated as a level input: when
5 1, the valve is commanded to open, and when 0 the valve is commanded to close.
3 When the checkbox is cleared, the Program commands follow the normal
6 command convention: write a 1 to the Program open command to open the valve,
and write a 1 to the Program close command to close the valve
7
When selected, the valve is spring-return (fail) to the open position (energize to
8 4 close). Leave the box unchecked if the valve is spring-return (fail) to the closed
position (energize to open).
9
5 Select to enable pulsing functions.
6 Select to allow the valve to pulse to the desired state.
When selected, the valve will finish pulsing to the desired state before executing a
7 command to open or close.
When selected, outputs are maintained on, even when the valve reaches the target
8 position. When the checkbox is cleared, outputs are turned off once the valve
reaches the target position.
When selected, outputs are maintained on when a valve has a full stall (failed to
9 move) or transit stall (failed to reach target position). When the checkbox is
cleared, outputs are turned off when a valve stall occurs.

Item Description
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when an I/O Fault condition occurs.
1 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an I/
1 O Fault condition.
2 IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a
3
reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
4 when a Transit Stall condition occurs.
5 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
trying) on a Transit Stall condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when
6 2 commanded to move, moved off its original position, but did not reach its
commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Transit Stall condition occurs,
a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
7
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
8 when a Full Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
9 3 trying) on a Full Stall condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded to
move, did not move off its original position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Full Stall condition occurs, a
reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when a Loss of Open Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep
trying) on a Loss of Open Position condition. (A Loss of Open Position means that
4 the valve was commanded to open, reached the open position as confirmed by the
limit switches, and then moved off the open position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Open Position
condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs
when a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs. Clear this checkbox to keep the
outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Loss of Closed
Position condition. (A Loss of Closed Position means that the valve was
5 commanded to close, reached the closed position as confirmed by the limit
switches, and then moved off the closed position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Closed Position
condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 305

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
The device always de-energizes on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared.
6 It is displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always de-energizes the
valve.
7 Enter the seconds to sound an audible alarm when the valve energizes.
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed
8 back when Simulation is enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.
9 Enable or disable virtual mode.

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
3 Displays the command text for Position 1.
4 Displays the command text for Position 2.
5 Displays the command text for Pulse Position 1.
1
6 Displays the command text for Pulse Position 2.
2
3 7 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
4 8 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
5
6

Item Description
Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the Valve
Statistics button visible on the Maintenance faceplate; Select this button to open
1
the Valve Statistics faceplate for this valve.
2 1 IMPORTANT: The name of the ValveStats object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your PVLV object has the
3 name ‘ValveMO123’, then its Valve Stats object must be named
‘ValveMO123_ValveStats’.
Select if an interlock instruction is used with this output.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name
4 2 of the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your PVLV object has the name
’ValveMO123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘ValveMO123_Intlk’
Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Open
Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to
open the Permissive faceplate.
3 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix ‘_Pos2Perm’. For example, if your PVLV object
has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its Permissive object must be named
5
‘ValveMO123_Pos2Perm’.
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
4 after any operator command.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
set to true.)
You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the
5 extended tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing
tag>.@Library and <backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display
the objects faceplate.

306 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Solenoid Operated Valve)
Studio 5000 View Designer faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View
SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve) on
page 303 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 307

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates (Configured as this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.
Solenoid Operated Valve)
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates (Configured as Solenoid Operated Valve) on
page 303 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

2 3 4
Item Description
1 Valve state indicator.
1 2 Select to have the valve pulse open.
3 Select to have the valve pulse closed.
4 Select to have the valve pulse continuously.
5 Select to open valve.
6 Select to close valve.

5 6

Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Select to open the Valve Statistics faceplate.
2 Select to use Valve Closed feedback for failure checking.
3 Select to use Valve Opened feedback for failure checking.
Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be
2 4 bypassed.
3

308 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
Enter the amount of time that the valve is not confirmed open or closed before a
1 2 Transit Stall.
3 Enter the seconds to sound an audible alarm when the valve energizes.
2
Enter the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed back
4 when Simulation is enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.
3
Enter the amount of time after receiving a command to open or close the valve before
5 changing the outputs to actually move the valve (command delay).
4
Enter the amount of time to pulse the open and close outputs when commanding the
6 valve. Enter zero if the outputs are to be maintained until the valve reaches the target
position.
5

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Features

Item Description
1 Select the Valve type.
1 2 Select if the valve has Closed feedback.
3 Select if the valve has Open feedback.
When selected, the valve is spring-return (fail) to the open position (energize to close).
4 Leave the box unchecked if the valve is spring-return (fail) to the closed position
(energize to open).
2
5 Select to enable pulsing functions.
3
6 Select to allow the valve to pulse to the desired state.
4
When selected, the valve will finish pulsing to the desired state before executing a
5 7 command to open or close.
6
7

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 309

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Valve Behavior

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

15

Item Description
Select to allow operator commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to trip, interlock trip), then move the valve.
1 Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
Select to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit stall, full stall, interlock trip), then move the valve.
2 Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command
When selected, the bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed when Override command source is selected. When the checkbox is cleared, the
3 bypassable interlocks and permissives are enforced in Override.
When selected, the Operator command button to close the valve is available even when a command source other than Operator or Maintenance is selected.
4 When the checkbox is cleared, the Operator close command button is only enabled in Operator or Maintenance command source.
When selected, the Program open command pin is treated as a level input: when 1, the valve is commanded to open, and when 0 the valve is commanded to
close. When the checkbox is cleared, the Program commands follow the normal command convention: write a 1 to the Program open command to open the
5 valve, and write a 1 to the Program close command to close the valve.

When selected, outputs are maintained on, even when the valve reaches the target position. When the checkbox is cleared, outputs are turned off once the
6 valve reaches the target position.
When selected, outputs are maintained on when a valve has a full stall (failed to move) or transit stall (failed to reach target position). When the checkbox is
7 cleared, outputs are turned off when a valve stall occurs.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when an I/O Fault condition occurs.
8 Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an I/O Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Transit Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Transit Stall condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when
9 commanded to move, moved off its original position, but did not reach its commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Transit Stall condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Full Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Full Stall condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded
10 to move, did not move off its original position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Full Stall condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Loss of Open Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Loss of Open Position condition. (A Loss of Open Position means
11 that the valve was commanded to open, reached the open position as confirmed by the limit switches, and then moved off the open position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Open Position condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.

310 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Item Description
Select to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Loss of Closed Position condition. (A Loss of Closed Position means
12 that the valve was commanded to close, reached the closed position as confirmed by the limit switches, and then moved off the closed position.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is selected and a Loss of Closed Position condition occurs, a reset is required before the valve can be energized.
The device always de-energizes on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always de-energizes
13 the valve.
Select 'ON' if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal operation. Select 'OFF' if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in
14 normal operation. This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal operation.
15 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Displays the text for Position 1.
2 Displays the text for Position 2.
3 Displays the command text for Position 1.
1 4 Displays the command text for Position 2.
2 5 Displays the command text for Pulse Position 1.
6 Displays the command text for Pulse Position 2.
Select if you have a PPERM instruction that is used with this valve for Open
3 Permissives. This action changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button
4 to open the Permissive faceplate.
5 7 IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix '_Pos2Perm'. For example, if your PVLV object
6 has the name 'ValveMO123', then its Permissive object must be named
'ValveMO123_Pos2Perm'.
Select if an interlock instruction is used with this output.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the
7 8 name of the object with the suffix '_Intlk'. For example, if your PVLV object has
the name 'ValveMO123', then its Interlock object must be named
8 'ValveMO123_Intlk'
9 Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the
Valve Statistics button visible on the Maintenance faceplate; Select this button
10 to open the Valve Statistics faceplate for this valve.
9 IMPORTANT: The name of the ValveStats object in the controller must be the
name of the object with the suffix '_ValveStats'. For example, if your PVLV
object has the name 'ValveMO123', then its Valve Stats object must be named
'ValveMO123_ValveStats'.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information
(Cfg_HasMoreObj is set to true.) You configure the tagname of the object that
10 you want to navigate to in the extended tag property
"Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the .@Library and .@Instruction
extended tag properties to display the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 311

Chapter 29 Process Valve (PVLV)

Notes:

312 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 30

Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic
Graphic Symbol Name FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol

This Mix-proof Valve graphic object allows for

GO_PVlvMP2D numerous orientations on displays

This 3-D orthogonal Mix-proof Valve graphic

object provides different valve angle positions
GO_PVlvMP_Orth on displays.

This 3-D orthogonal Mix-proof Valve graphic

object provides different valve angle positions
GO_PVlvMP_Orth1 on displays.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an operator can monitor
the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator command source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 313

Chapter 30 Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

1 2 3
Item Description
1 Select to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Cavity state.
2 Select to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Lower Seat state.
3 Select to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Upper Seat state.
4 Select to go to the Lift Valve Lower Seat state.
5 Select to go to the Lift Valve Upper Seat state.
6 Select to open valve.
7 Select to close valve.

4 5 6 7

Maintenance Tab
Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance tab to adjust
device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device problems, and disable the
device for routine maintenance.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings. The Advanced
Properties Display provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges, and
options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later
system changes.

314 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 30 Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

Item Description
Enter a value (seconds) that gives the valve time to achieve state before triggering a
1
valve failure fault.
1
2 Enter a value (seconds) that the valve seat is held closed when pulsing for cleaning.
2 3 Enter a value (seconds) that the valve seat is held open when pulsing for cleaning.

Item Description
Select a state box to open the State Configuration display to access configuration
1 parameters for the valve state

2 3 4
Item Description
Enter a value (seconds) the feedback must match for the valve to achieve the selected
1 state.
2 Set State of each Output in the selected valve state.
3 Select to require a feedback signal for the selected valve state.
4 Sets the desired value of the feedback signals for the selected valve state.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 315

Chapter 30 Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

Engineering Tab

Item Description
1 Select to enable the lift lower seat state for the valve.
1 2 Select to enable pulsing in the lift lower state.
3 Select to enable the lift upper seat state for the valve.
2
4 Select to enable pulsing in the lift upper state.
3 5 Select to enable the clean lower seat state.
4 6 Select to enable pulsing in the clean lower seat state
7 Select to enable the clean upper seat state.
5 8 Select to enable pulsing in the clean upper seat state.
9 Select to enable the clean cavity state.
6

Item Description
1 Select to reset a fault on a new Operator command.
1 2 Select to reset a fault on a new External command.
3 Select to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.
2
4 Select to have Close command always available to Operator control.
3 5 Select to have Close command always available to External control.
4 Select to close the valve when an I/O Fault occurs. A reset is required to clear this
latched shed condition.
5 6
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not trip the valve if an
I/O fault is detected.
6 Select to close the valve when a Position Fail occurs. A reset is required to clear this
7
latched shed condition.
7
8 Clear this checkbox to show only the Position Fail status/alarm and not trip the valve
if a Position Fail is detected
9 The device always sheds (closes) on interlock not OK. This item cannot be unchecked.
8 It is displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always triggers a shed.
Enter the time (in seconds) that the audible sounds when there is a commanded State
9 change.

316 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 30 Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

Item Description
1 Select yes to enable virtual.
1

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_OpenIntlkOK. The Open Interlock
1 indicator becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_UpperSeatIntlkOK. The Upper Seat
2 Interlock indicator becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_LowerSeatIntlkOK. The Lower Seat
3 Interlock indicator becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
1
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_CavityIntlkOK. The Cavity Interlock
4
2 indicator becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
Select if the Valve Stats instruction (for example, P_ValveStats) is used with this device.
3 This check adds a button to the faceplate that opens the Valve Stats faceplate.
4 5 IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Statistics object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your raP_Dvc_VlvMP object has
5 the name ’ValveMP123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘ValveMP123_ValveStats’.
6 Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
6 You configure the tagname of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended
tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing tag>.@Library and
<backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display the objects faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 317

Chapter 30 Mix-proof Valve (PVLVMP)

Item Description
1 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
2 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.
1 Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
3
2
after any operator command.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 313 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator Tab

Maintenance

318 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 31

Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk Optix Graphic Studio 5000 View Designer
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Graphic Symbol
GO_PVLVS PVLVS_GS GS_PVLVS
Graphic symbol which launches the faceplate for the Valve
Statistics device.

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
Operator

1 3

2 4

Item Description
1 Select to clear Failed to Complete stroke counts.
2 Select to clear Maximum time.
3 Select to clear Slow Stroke counts.
4 Select to clear Average time.
5 Select to clear Total time

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 319

Chapter 31 Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

Advanced Engineering

Item Description
1 Select if valve has Stopped or other states to be monitored.
1 Enter the maximum time for valve to be in the closing state before indicating
2 that the valve closed slower than expected.
2 Enter the maximum time for valve to be in the opening state before indicating
3 that valve opened slower than expected.
3

Advanced HMI

Item Description
1 The text for Stopped or Other State to be displayed in HMI.

320 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 31 Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 319 for descriptions of the
features.

Operator

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 321

Chapter 31 Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. This object has
no Trends, Diagnostics, or Alarms tabs.
Faceplates
FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 319 for descriptions of the features.

Operator

1 3

2 4

Item Description
1 Select to clear Failed to Complete stroke counts.
2 Select to clear Maximum time.
3 Select to clear Slow Stroke counts.
4 Select to clear Average time.
5 Select to clear Total time

322 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 31 Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

Advanced Engineering

Item Description
Enter the maximum time for valve to be in the closing state before indicating that the
1 valve closed slower than expected.
1 Enter the maximum time for valve to be in the opening state before indicating that
2 valve opened slower than expected.
2
3 Select if valve has Stopped or other state(s) to be monitored.

Advanced HMI

Item Description
1 The text for Stopped or Other State to be displayed in HMI.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 323

Chapter 31 Process Valve Statistics (PVLVS)

Notes:

324 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32

Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Graphic Symbols
FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic PV5000 Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Symbol
GO_PVSD GS_PVSD

GO_PVSD1 GS_Motor_R GS_PVSD1

Motors operate in different positions:

right, up, and down.

GO_PVSD4 GS_PVSD4

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 325

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic PV5000 Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Symbol

GS_Blower_R

Blowers operate in different positions:

right, left, up, and down.

GS_Pump_R

Pumps operate in several positions:

right, left, and up

326 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic PV5000 Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Symbol

Inline motors operate in several positions:

— up, left, down, and right.

GS_Agitator

Agitator that is shown as a Graphic Symbol.

— Conveyor that is shown as a Graphic Symbol.

— Fan that is shown as a Graphic Symbol.

— Mixer that is shown as a Graphic Symbol

— Rotary Pump that is shown as a Graphic Symbol

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 327

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

FactoryTalk View SE Graphic FactoryTalk Optix Graphic PV5000 Graphic Symbol Description
Symbol Symbol

— — Indicator with label.

— — Blower indicator

— — Motor indicator

— — Pump indicator

328 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

FactoryTalk View SE There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1 1 Drive state indicator.
2 Current speed of the drive.
2 3 Setpoint for the speed of the drive.
4 Current command source (Program, Operator, Override, Maintenance, or Hand)
3 5 Jog drive in reverse.
6 Start drive in reverse.
7 Stop drive.
8 Start drive forward.
9 Jog drive forward.

4 5 6 7 8 9

Maintenance Tab

1 2 3 4

Item Description
1 Display Runtime Accumulator Faceplate.
2 Display Restart Inhibit Faceplate.
5 3 Display Device Faceplate.
4 Enter the Jog Setpoint.
6
5 Select to use Run Feedback.
Enter the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint outside this
6 range is entered, the speed is clamped at these limits and Sts_SpeedLimited is
asserted.
7 Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed.
7

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 329

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset
1 command is received.
1
Enter the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that
2
2 the drive has started before raising a Fail to Start alarm.
Enter the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that
the drive has stopped before raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
3 3 TIP: Allow extra time for the drive to decelerate or coast to zero speed before it
4 returns a confirmed Stopped status.
4 Enter the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.

Engineering Tab

Item Description
Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the maximum speed feedback from
1 the drive.
Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the minimum speed feedback from
2 the drive. (This value is usually zero.)
1 Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed reference that is sent to
3
2 the drive.
5
Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed reference that is sent to
6
4 the drive. (This value is usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing
drives. Reversing is handled separately.)
5 Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed feedback from the drive.
Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed feedback from the drive.
3 6 (This value is usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives.
Reversing is handled separately.
4
7 Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the maximum speed reference
7
8 sent to the drive.
Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the minimum speed reference
8 sent to the drive. (This
value is usually zero.)

330 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Item Description
Select if the drive provides a run feedback signal. This check enables feedback
1
1 checking for Fail to Start and Fail to Stop.
Clear this checkbox if here is no run feedback.
2 Select if the drive provides a speed feedback signal.
2 Clear this checkbox if there is no speed feedback.
3
Select if Speed feedback greater than zero is used to signify the drive is running.
4 3 IMPORTANT: This configuration setting is available only if the previous
configuration setting is checked.
5 Select to reset faults when a new operator drive command, such as start or stop,
6 4 is issued.
Clear this checkbox to require an explicit reset command to clear faults.
7 Select to reset faults when a new external drive command, such as start or stop, is
5 issued.
8 Clear this checkbox to require an explicit reset command to clear faults.
9 Select to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable
6 the drive to be jogged from the faceplate.
10 Select to make the forward and reverse direction command buttons visible on the
7 Operator tab and enable the drive to run forward or reverse.
Select to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in
8 Override command source.
Select (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
Command Source is not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a
9 reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or
Maintenance command source.
Select (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
Command Source is not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
10
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command
source is External.

Item Description
1 Select to allow for local command source start and stop without triggering a fault.
1 Select to have Program settings, such as Speed Reference, track Operator settings
2 in Operator command source, and have Operator settings track Program settings
2 in Program command source.
3 Select to have Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed
3 Reference in Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command
source.
Select to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected.
4 Clear this checkbox show the I/O Fault Status/Alarm only and not stop the drive if
4
5 an
I/O Fault is detected.
6 When the bit is on and a motor Fail to Start is detected, the drive is stopped. A
reset is required before another start can be attempted.
7 5 If the bit is off and a drive Fail to Start is detected, the instruction sets only the
Sts_FailToStart status (and the Alm_FailToStart alarm, if so configured). The
outputs are not changed, so the instruction continues to start the drive.
The drive always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is
6 displayed as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the drive.
Enter the time (in seconds) that the audible sounds when there is a commanded
7 State change.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 331

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Item Description
This selection determines whether control of the drive speed reference follows
1 the command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator,
stays with the program, or stays with the external command source.
This selection determines whether control of the drive starting and stopping
2 follows the command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the
operator, stays with the program, or stays with the external command source.
1 This selection determines whether control of the drive jogging follows the
3 command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator,
2 stays with the program, or stays with the external command source.
3 This selection determines whether control of the output datalink value follows the
4 command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator,
4 stays with the program, or stays with the external command source.
5 Enter the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Virtual.
5 6 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Item Description
1 Select to make the Input Datalink configuration and operation functions visible.
2 Enter the minimum and maximum raw (from the drive) units for the Input Datalink.
1 3 Select to make the Output Datalink configuration and operation functions visible.
2 5 Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in
4 Engineering Units.
Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Input Datalink in
5 Engineering Units.
Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in Raw (to
6 the drive) Units. Enter the text to display for the label and units of measure of the
3 Output Datalink.
4 6

332 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

HMI Configuration Tab

Item Description
1 Display name for running forward direction.
2 Display name for running reverse direction.
3 Display name for starting forward direction.
4 Display name for starting reverse direction.
5 Display name for Stopped status.
1
2 6 Display name for Stopping status.
3 7 Display name for jogging forward direction.
4 8 Display name for jogging reverse direction.
5
6
7
8

Item Description
1 Display name for start forward direction.
1 2 Display name for start reverse direction.
2 3 Display name for Stop
3
4 Display name for jog forward direction.
4
5 Display name for jog reverse direction.
5
6 6 Display name for input Datalink.
7 7 Display name for output Datalink.
8 Enter the decimal places to display for actual speed.
8
9 Enter the decimal places to display for Input Datalink.
9

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 333

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Item Description
Select if a permissive object is connected to Inp_FwdPermOK. The permissive
indicator becomes a button that opens the permissive faceplate.
1 1 IMPORTANT: The name of the permissive object in the controller must be the
2 name of the object with the suffix "_FwdPerm".
Select if a permissive object is connected to Inp_RevPermOK. The permissive
3 indicator becomes a button that opens the permissive faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the permissive object in the controller must be the
4 name of the object with the suffix "_RevPerm".
5 Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator
becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
6 3 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix ‘_Intlk_0’. For example, if your PVSD object has the
name ’Drive123’, then its Interlock object must be named ‘Drive123_Intlk’
Select if a restart inhibit object is connected. The button that opens the Restart
7 Inhibit faceplate appears.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the
4
8 name of the object with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your PVSD object has
the name ’Drive123’, then its Restart Inhibit object must be named
‘Drive123_ResInh’
Select if a runtime object is connected. The button that opens the runtime
faceplate appears.
5 IMPORTANT: The name of the runtime object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your PVSD object has the
name ‘Drive123’, then its runtime object must be named ‘Drive123_RunTime’.
6 Select to allow navigation to the device object.
7 Select to allow Operator to shelve alarm.
8 Select to allow Maintenance to disable alarm.

Item Description
Select to configure operator command confirmation. This action would take place
1
1 after any operator command.
2 Select to configure if a Historical data source will be used or not.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is
set to true.) This can be configured to navigate to an Add-On Instruction backing
tag or a UDT tag that has HMI_Type and HMI_Lib defined.
For example, there is a motor with the tag name P_101 and there is a need to have
3 the more information button navigate to the parent P_LLS object. A tag is created
for the P_LLS object that is given the alias P101_More. When the more information
2 button is pressed on the motor, it links to P101_More. This opens the faceplate for
the LLS object.

Studio 5000 View Designer There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

Studio 5000 View Designer® faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk®
View SE faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 329 for descriptions of the
features.

334 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Operator Tab

Maintenance Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 335

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

FactoryTalk Optix There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions. The Trends tab,
Diagnostics tab, and Alarms tab all have the same basic functionality and are not described in
Faceplates this section. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 41.

FactoryTalk® Optix™ faceplates contain features that are used in the FactoryTalk View SE
faceplates. See FactoryTalk View SE Faceplates on page 329 for descriptions of the features.

Operator Tab

Item Description
1
1 Drive state indicator.
10
2 2 Current speed of the drive.
11 3 Setpoint for the speed of the drive.
Current command source (Program, Operator, Override, Maintenance, or
3 4 Hand)
5 Jog drive in reverse.
6 Jog drive forward
7 Start drive in reverse.
8 Stop drive.
9 Start drive forward.
10 Input datalink (if used).
4 5 6 7 8 9
11 Output datalink (if used).

Maintenance Tab - General Configuration

1 2 3 4

Item Description
1 Display Runtime Accumulator Faceplate.
2 Display Restart Inhibit Faceplate.
3 Display Device Faceplate.
5 4 Enter the Jog Setpoint.
5 Select to use Run Feedback.

336 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Maintenance Tab – Speed Setpoint Limits

Item Description
Enter the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint
1 outside this range is entered, the speed is clamped at these limits and
Sts_SpeedLimited is asserted.

Maintenance Tab – Interlocks and Permissives

Item Description
Select yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be
1 bypassed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 337

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Item Description
Enter the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset
1 command is received.
1
Enter the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that the
2
2 drive has started before raising a Fail to Start alarm.
Enter the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that the
3 drive has stopped before raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
3 TIP: Allow extra time for the drive to decelerate or coast to zero speed before it returns
4
a confirmed Stopped status.
5 4 Enter the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.
Enter the time (in seconds) that the audible sounds when there is a commanded State
6 5 change.
7
6 Enter the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Virtual.
Enter values for the maximum and minimum Output Datalink clamping limits, in
engineering (display) units. The Output Datalink is clamped to keep it within these
7 limits when sending to the drive. These entries are disabled if the 'Drive has output
datalink' check box is clear on Advanced Engineering Tab.

Advanced Engineering Tab - Drive Features

Item Description
Select if the drive provides a run feedback signal. This check enables feedback
1 checking for Fail to Start and Fail to Stop. Clear this checkbox if here is no run
1 feedback.
2 Select if the drive provides a speed feedback signal. Clear this checkbox if there is no
2
3
speed feedback.
Select if Speed feedback greater than zero is used to signify the drive is running.
4 3 IMPORTANT: This configuration setting is available only if the previous configuration
5 setting is checked.
6 Select to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the
4 drive to be jogged from the faceplate.
7
Select to make the forward and reverse direction command buttons visible on the
5 Operator tab and enable the drive to run forward or reverse.
6 Select to make the Input Datalink configuration and operation functions visible.
7 Select to make the Output Datalink configuration and operation functions visible.

338 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced Engineering Tab - Drive Behavior

Item Description
Select to reset faults when a new operator drive command, such as start or stop, is
1 issued. Clear this checkbox to require an explicit reset command to clear faults.
Select to reset faults when a new external drive command, such as start or stop, is
1 2 issued. Clear this checkbox to require an explicit reset command to clear faults.
2 Select to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in
3
3 Override command source.
Select (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
4 Command Source is not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
4
5 Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance
command source.
6
7 Select (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the
Command Source is not External, the motor or drive requires a reset. Clear this
5
8 checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is
External.
6 Select to allow for local command source start and stop without triggering a fault.
9
10 Select to have Program settings, such as Speed Reference, track Operator settings in
11 7 Operator command source, and have Operator settings track Program settings in
Program command source.
12
Select to have Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed
8 Reference in Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.
Select to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected. Clear this checkbox show the I/O
9 Fault Status/Alarm only and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected.
When the bit is on and a motor Fail to Start is detected, the drive is stopped. A reset is
required before another start can be attempted.
10 If the bit is off and a drive Fail to Start is detected, the instruction sets only the
Sts_FailToStart status (and the Alm_FailToStart alarm, if so configured). The outputs
are not changed, so the instruction continues to start the drive.
The drive always stops on interlock not OK. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed
11 as a reminder that the interlock function always stops the drive.
12 Enable or disable virtual mode.

Advanced Engineering Tab – Drive Speed Scaling

Item Description
Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the maximum speed feedback from
1 the drive.
Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the minimum speed feedback from
2 the drive. (This value is usually zero.)
Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed reference that is sent to
3 the drive.
1 Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed reference that is sent to
4 the drive. (This value is usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing
2 5 drives. Reversing is handled separately.)
6 5 Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed feedback from the drive.
Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed feedback from the drive.
6 (This value is usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives.
Reversing is handled separately.
Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the maximum speed reference sent
3 7 to the drive.
4 Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the minimum speed reference sent
7 8 to the drive. (This value is usually zero.)
8

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 339

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced Engineering Tab – Input Datalink

Item Description
Left to Right:
• Enter the minimum and maximum raw (from the drive) values for the Input
1 Datalink.
• Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Input Datalink in
Engineering Units.

Advanced Engineering Tab – Output Datalink

Item Description
Left to Right:
• Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in
Engineering Units.
1
• Enter the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in Raw (to
the drive) Units. Enter the text to display for the label and units of measure of the
Output Datalink.

340 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced CmdSrc Tab – Command Source Exceptions

Item Description
This selection determines whether control of the drive speed reference follows the
1 command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator, stays with
the program, or stays with the external command source.
This selection determines whether control of the drive starting and stopping follows
2 the command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator, stays
with the program, or stays with the external command source.
This selection determines whether control of the drive jogging follows the command
3 source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator, stays with the
program, or stays with the external command source.
This selection determines whether control of the output datalink value follows the
4 command source that is selected for the instruction, stays with the operator, stays with
1 the program, or stays with the external command source.
2
3
4

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Identification

Item Description
1 Display name for input Datalink.
2 Display name for output Datalink.

1
2

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 341

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Units and Precision

Item Description
1 Units of measure to display for the speed feedback value.
2 Units of measure to display for the speed reference value.
3 Units of measure to display for the input datalink value.
1
2 4 Units of measure to display for the output datalink value.
3 5 Enter the decimal places to display for actual speed.
4
6 Enter the decimal places to display for Input Datalink.
7 Enter the decimal places to display for Output Datalink.
5

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Status Text

Item Description
1 Display name for running forward direction.
2 Display name for running reverse direction.
3 Display name for starting forward direction.
4 Display name for starting reverse direction.
1
2 5 Display name for Stopped status.
3 6 Display name for Stopping status.
4 7 Display name for jogging forward direction.
5
6 8 Display name for jogging reverse direction.
7
8

342 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Command Text

Item Description
1 Display name for start forward direction
2 Display name for start reverse direction.
3 Display name for Stop.
4 Display name for jog forward direction.
5 Display name for jog reverse direction.
1
2
3
4
5

Advanced HMI Configuration Tab – Navigation

Item Description
Select if a permissive object is connected to Inp_FwdPermOK. The permissive indicator
becomes a button that opens the permissive faceplate.
1 IMPORTANT: The name of the permissive object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix "_FwdPerm".
Select if a permissive object is connected to Inp_RevPermOK. The permissive indicator
becomes a button that opens the permissive faceplate.
2 IMPORTANT: The name of the permissive object in the controller must be the name of
the object with the suffix "_RevPerm".
Select if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator
1 becomes a button that opens the interlock faceplate.
2 3 IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix '_Intlk_0'. For example, if your PVSD object has the name
3 'Drive123', then its Interlock object must be named 'Drive123_Intlk'.
4 Select if a restart inhibit object is connected. The button that opens the Restart Inhibit
5 faceplate appears.
6 4 IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name
of the object with the suffix '_ResInh'. For example, if your PVSD object has the name
'Drive123', then its Restart Inhibit object must be named 'Drive123_ResInh'.
7
Select if a runtime object is connected. The button that opens the runtime faceplate
appears.
5 IMPORTANT: The name of the runtime object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix '_RunTime'. For example, if your PVSD object has the name
'Drive123', then its runtime object must be named 'Drive123_RunTime'.
6 Select to allow navigation to the device object.
Select to enable navigation to an object with more information (Cfg_HasMoreObj is set
to true.)
7 You configure the tag name of the object that you want to navigate to in the extended
tag property "Cfg_HasMoreObj.@Navigation". It uses the <backing tag>.@Library and
<backing tag>.@Instruction extended tag properties to display the object’s faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 343

Chapter 32 Variable Speed Drive (PVSD)

Notes:

344 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

 PlantPAx Faceplates for Process Controller Instructions Reference Manual

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025 345

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product
Technical Support Center rok.auto/support
notification updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user
Technical Documentation Center rok.auto/techdocs
manuals.
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) release notes.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Allen-Bradley, expanding human possibility, FactoryTalk, Optix, OptixPanel, PanelView, PlantPAx, Rockwell Automation, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, and Studio 5000 View Designer are
trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
EtherNet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Publication PROCES-RM203C-EN-P - April 2025

Supersedes Publication PROCES-RM203B-EN-P - June 2024 Copyright © 2025 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.